Home
        Buick LESABRE 1997 Owner`s manual
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                                425                                   245   Rear Door Security                           2 8            Paper                             betel aie  uide   2 13                               HC THEN CUM SCR EL    9 6    Low Fuel Light 1    Lubricants and                                         7 45  Lubnicatton Service  Body       XE a   7 40  Missnasteer e        RENE er ed i      ee te tz g 4 10    Maintenance  Normal Replacement Parts              6 62    Mrntengince             loses eer me mm rx 7 47  Maintenance Schedule            pe e EIE 14 sd  Long Trip Highway Definition                      7 6  Long Trip Highway Intervals                  AES 7 6  Owner Checks and                                       1 39  Periodic Maintenance Inspections                  7 42  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 2                7 43  Scheduled Maintenance Services                7 4  Short TnprCity Definition reserare ee ae es 7 3  Short Trip City Intervals              FIOR ODER  Maintenance  Underbody                           6 52  Maintenance When Trailer Towing 2                 4 29  Malfunction Indicator Lamp                         2 66  Manual Front Seat               USUS EU ae     oe  Manual Remote Control Mirror                      2 49  Maxifuse Relay Center               sese ir Mna  Memory Lect                 guis 2 5  Personal Choice   
2.                                                  1 36           ARR    al cad          em aro era ea aTa         Torque                                        ess dde  Dl  Towing    Trailer            4 33  Towing Your Veluclat        cele rur rut                    5 8  Traction  CODO                                   Fa iE fe        4 9  Contro  System Warning Light                2 64  4 9  OF Warning Light                             E Aa 4 9    9 10    Trailer  Brakes i  Driving on Grades       AER ILLUC              CET ILE E AI  ECCE  Hite hes i    Stee        Pom  4 h           Maintenance When Towing      ag ae E Ee ua acuti    Parking on Hills  Safety Chains  Tongue Weight  Total Weight on Tires           Towing  Turn Signals    Weight  Transaxle Fluid  Automatic  Transmitters  Matching to Your Vehicle  Transmitters  Remote Keyless Entry                   Transportation  Courtesy       Trip Odometer  Trunk  Lock  Release Lockout  Remote  Release  Remote   Stet TERE  SEY                                      TTY Users    Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator  Tutti Signal On Chime  Turn Signal  Rear  Bulb Replacement  Turn Signal Multifunction Lever                     Turn Signals When Towing a                             Twilight Sentinel                                                                        mores pom  or    o     wo oy rFo             Prom    om       treet ie                             014  c onc                                             utc e 
3.                                           2211  PRIN re Genie ste peed ard eerie ees EP eR  WENA Bias                   io EI 2 47  Automatic Dimming Outside                                 Convex Outside 222222222222    ee ree ey il  Day Night Rearview                     4     2 47  Day Night Rearview with Reading Lumps           2 48  Electrochromic Day Night Rearview         aie        Manual Remote                                        2 49  Power Remo Control   leonem rne ew oem dace 2 50                 2 53          Taa E E TU EE UE  EA     PANN ep Ip Louccicse us Ee WEFEERECHEE DUI TA 2 17  Multifunction Lever   Der ca s cock         MEN Perimeter LONAN saa        etr Fe      ep Pa 2 45  Personal Choice Programming                                2 45  Na  DOVER Lo sev cia peste ie rex anmucaand 2 32 Periodic Maintenance Inspections                    7 43   Neutral  Automatic Transaxle 2                     2 25 Personal Choice Programming  New Vehicle Break In       2                     2 19 Delayed Locking                        aiken vad 27                     4 17 Memory Door Locks                    2 6  Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts               6 62 Perimeter Lighting                 2 45     Security PesdbatK        cerco y nim rre nehm 2 11     Power  Oo  s e ee rer tA                        or E T NER          Deor Locks  curare          seta E084             2 5  OR Rond         OR MSN      SOME 224      PUE          ed         ETA 6 53  Ol Engin
4.                           2 31 Seat Passengers  DURER fcd  ette odium            OLEO        3 11 Towing       OCURRE             MUI      5 11  Passing                              emt 4 13 Window Defogger          eee 3 10  9 7             Rear Turn Signal Bulb Replacement                  6 35  Pear view        o  ora nur rrr       2 47  Electrochromic Day Night zB atts        Sart meer EA 2 48  Inside Dav Night                                    2 47  Inside Day Night with Reading Lamps              2 47  Reclining Front Seatbacks                           1 4  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants                 7 45  Recovery Tank  Coolant              5 17  Refrigerants  Air Conditioning                     6 62  Remote  Keyless           jose pete cere EE 2 9  Keyless Entry System  Instant Alarm en Da al UNC ela 2 10  Keyless Entry System  Personal Choice             2 11  Keyless Entry System  Resynchronization           2 10  Keyless Entry System  Security Feedback          Par         Trunk Relea                                             2 13  Trunk Release Lockout                          2 14  Replacement                       ala alae IRE See 6 61                  6 62  bi     CRT UM TURPE ER T Er PU                 6 44  Replacing Safety Belts               eee eee nn 1 46  Reporting Safety Defects                            8 8  Restraints         QUE OR           ace vn ee um ratos Wb Aca 1 46  Child      a eee eee aat tre 1 35  Head  oct VIX PE RS          ha
5.                A                7  Connect the red positive     cable to the positive      terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery  Use a  remote positive     terminal if the vehicle has one           Now connect the black  negative     cable to  the good battery  s  negative     terminal     Don t let the other end  touch anything until the  next step  The other  end of the negative      cable doesn t go to the  dead battery  It goes   to a heavy unpainted  metal part on the engine  of the vehicle with the  dead battery     10           Attach the cable at least 15 inches  45 cm  away  from the dead battery  but not near engine parts that  move  The electrical connection is just as good  there  but the chance of sparks getting back to the  battery is much less     Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  the engine for a while       Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery     If it won t start after    few tries  it probably  needs service     5 7    13  Remove the cables in reverse order  Take care that  they don t touch each other or any other metal            Heavy Metal Engine Part  B  Good Battery  C  Dead Battery    Li 1 r LJ     Towing Your Vehicle  Try to have a Buick dealer or a professional towing  service tow your LeSabre  See    Roadside Assistance        the Index   Il vour vehicle has been changed or modified since it  was factory new by adding aftermarket items like fog  lamps  aero skirting  or special tires and wheels  these  instruc
6.              Move the lever all the way down   3  Do the same for the other rear door     The rear door locks will now work normally     Lockout Protection    The power door locks will not work if the key is left in  the ignition with the driver s door open  You can override  this feature by holding the power door lock switch For  more than three seconds  unless the engine is running     Leaving Your Vehicle    If you        leaving the vehicle  take your keys  open your  door and set the locks from the inside  Then get out and  clase the door  Or  you may also use the lock button on  the remote keyless entry transmitter after shutting   the doors     If vour vehicle has a theft deterrent system  see   Universal Theft Deterrent  in the Index   Remote Keyless Entry System   If Equipped     If vour Buick has this option  you can lock and unlock  your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet    m   up to 30 feet  9 m  away using the remote keyless entry  transmitter supplied with your vehicle           Your Remote Keyless Entry  System operates on a radio  frequency subject to  Federal Communications  Commission  FCC  Rules  and with Industry and  Science Canada     This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules   Operation is subject to the following two conditions     1  this device may not cause harmful interference  and   2  this device must accept any interference received   including interference that may cause undesired operation     This device complies with RS5 
7.             4 51 Clock  Setting the soca rere rre device peepee esis 3 12  Chains  S CETUR E MEG Efe RATER m rame h 46 Coinholder a ve E esti Dae                          TEM D Ea X sita e MEE    2 5   Change Oil Indicator                                e Comfort Controls                                    cen OTe    9 2       Compact Disc Carm vorrei rk        heed rixa 534 Delayed Locking               LEER ELSE      2 7  Compact Disc        Lees               Rn 3 24  3 29 Personal Choice Programming       MEETS BIRD MAR iK d 2 7  Compact Disc Player                                3 24  3 29 Dimensions                              gt         xo   h 62  Compact Spare The          2520 Dolby    B Noise Reduction               3 11  3 21  3 29  Console Storage                       S ER TTE 2 51 Door Luci ccr aeui  tcp rie CARE        EORR 2 4  Control of a Vehicle    cas losses  Vv x edo 4 5 Driver Position 2 2  cue eee rane wid it 1 11  Cp oeminabe NOE  creer xta      mer Driving  Convex Outside Miror      2 2 gt  2     2      2    2 50 FEE                        aT STR      4 21  d i              4                                 6 19 Debate           I EI ES KEW EG al 4 2  Heater  Engine 2                  Y Y X Ye 2 22                                    Wee sine                  NO  BRecovenr Tank                              ea ea 5 17 FEINER cars rs                        were sly ay RM PF 4 22                     eee eee ces eran RS 3 13 Ina Blizzard           ee     
8.        Driving on Snow or Ice    Most of the time  those places where your tires meet the  road probably have good traction     However  if there ts snow or        between your tires and  the road  you can have a very slippery situation  You ll  have a lot less traction or    grip    and will need to be  very careful           What s th   worst time for this   Wet ice   Very cold  snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on  But wet  ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the  least traction of all  You can get wet ice when it s about  freezing  32  F  0  C  and freezing rain begins to fall   Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews  can get there     Whatever the condition    smooth ice  packed  blowing  or loose snow    drive with caution     If you have traction control  keep the system on  It will  improve vour ability to accelerate when driving on     slippery road  Even though your vehicle has a traction  control system  you ll want to slow down and adjust  your driving to the road conditions  See  Traction  Control System  in the Index     If you don t have the traction control system  accelerate  gently  Try not to break the fragile traction  If you  accelerate too fast  the drive wheels will spin and polish  the surface under the tires even more     Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability  when you make a hard stop on a slippery road  Even  though you have the anti lock braking system  you ll  want to begin stopping sooner
9.        The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver s side of  your vehicle        6 5    If you get gasoline on yourself and then  something ignites it  you could be badly burned   Gasoline can spray out on you if vou open the    fuel filler cap too quickly  This spray can happen  if your tank is nearly full  and is more likely in  hot weather  Open the fuel filler cap slowly and  wait for any    hiss    noise to stop  Then unscrew  the cap all the way        Be careful not to spill gasoline  Clean gasoline from  painted surfaces as soon as possible  See  Cleaning the  Outside of Your Buick  in the Index     Because you have the  L36  3800 V6 engine  your fuel  cap will be tethered and you cannot hang it on the inside  fuel door while refueling     To take off the cap  turn it slowly to the left   counterclock wise         When you put the cap hack on  turn it to the right Checking Things Under the Hood   clockwise  until you hear a clicking sound  Make sure     you fully install the cap  The diagnostic system can   z  determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly  installed  This would allow fuel to evaporate into the  atmosphere  See    Malfunction Indicator Lamp    in   the Index     NOTICE     If you need a new cap  be sure to get the right  type  Your dealer can get one for you  If you get  the wrong type  it may not fit properly  This mas  cause vour malfunction indicator lamp to light  and your fuel tank and emissions system may be  damaged  See    Malfun
10.       2 12      24 9               Underbody Flushing Sarees el ern 7 42  Underbody Maintenance                   2 2      6 32  Universal                           2 16  Vehicle  Asi ira  gaa SPART 4 5  Damage Weminis d       Vat wa CE dir Ix  Dimensions                6 62  Identification Number 7 11 14    6 54  Loading 4 3                                         ee vae a Ee 5 28  Ventilation                    QR          karte De E   Visor Vanity MITOS  ee ee ee o rmm n 2 33  Visors  Sun   2 43  Tw DIEGO                ERE                        2 6   Wi  ning Devices                 piece Te   Warning Lights  Gages and Indicators                    Warranty Information    0 04 06 ans R E  Washer Fluid  Windshield                          6 24  Washing Your Vehicle   6 50                                               C EHE FALE Y EHE   6 50    Wheel  Alignment                             EIE Lee   Miu pln gna ta  e aeaea a ee                Replacement   nai a aAa        Al as eA al 8 44   Wheel Cover Removal eae EP VISITER EP ac   Wheel  Nut Cap Removill                         3 25  Wire Wheel Cover Removal                      5 28  Wrench                                               C PCI            o Lock 1  111 vet eui                            Suy LX                                       2 33  Express  Down liie eeu 2 33  POET                EEIE          Eod Pare 2 33  Windshield Washer redo HET 2 37                            nic    he ote ce eae bs ac    6 24 
11.       If your Buick has this climate control system  the  following information tells you how it works     3 2    Fan Button    The FAN control is used to select the speed of the  blower fan and the force of air vou want  There are   four speeds to choose from  Moving the lever between  LOW and HIGH will decrease or increase the fan speed   The fan will be off when the system is off     Temperature Lever    This lever adjusts the temperature of the air coming  through the system  Move the TEMPERATURE lever to  change the temperature of the air coming through your  outlets  Move the lever between COOL and WARM to  lower or raise the temperature     Mode Controls    The buttons on your system allow you lo choose  settings to deliver air through the lower  middle or  windshield outlets                   Press this button to limit the amount of  outside air entering your vehicle  This is helpful when  you        trying to cool the interior of the vehicle quickly   or limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle   To turn off RECIRC  press the button again  If you  select FRONT defrost or BLEND while RECIRC ts  selected  the system will automatically tum off RECIRC  to prevent logging        VENT  This setting directs outside air through the  middle instrument panel outlets  The air conditioning  compressor is not working when VENT is selected     HTR  This button directs air out of the heater outlets   Most of the air will come from the floor outlets while  some air will
12.       To rock vour vehicle back und forth to get out of snow   ice or sand without damaging your transaxle  see    Stuck  in Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow    in the Index        2 24        NEUTRAL     0  In this position  your engine   doesn t connect with the wheels  To restart when you re  already moving  use NEUTRAL              Also  use  NEUTRAL  N  when your vehicle is being towed     Shifting out of PARK  P  or NEUTRAL      while  your engine is    racing     running at high speed     is dangerous  Unless your foot is firmly on the  brake pedal  your vehicle could move very  rapidly  You could lose control and hit people  or objects  Don t shift out of PARK        or  NEUTRAL iN   while your engine is racing        NOTICE     Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out  of PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N  with the engine  racing isn t covered by your warranty           AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  0   This position is  for normal driving  If you need more power for passing   and you re     e Going less than about 35 mph  56 km h   push your  accelerator pedal about halfway down         Going about 35 mph  56 km h  or more  push the  accelerator all the way down     You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power     THIRD  3   This position is also used for normal  driving  however  it offers more power and lower fuel  economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  0      Here are some times vou might choose THIRD  3   instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  0      e When driving on hilly  winding roa
13.      2 40       Using Cruise Control on Hills    How well your cruise control will work on hills depends  upon your speed  load and the steepness of the hills   When going up steep hills  you may have to step on the  accelerator pedal to maintain your speed  When going  downhill  you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear  to keep your speed down  Applying the brake or shifting  into a lower gear will take you out of cruise control  If  vou need to apply the brake or shift to a lower gear due  to the grade of the downhill slope  you may not want to  attempt to use your cruise control feature     Ending Cruise Control  There are two ways to turn off the cruise control      Step lightly on the brake pedal  or    e Move the cruise switch to OFF     Erasing Speed Memor     When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition   your cruise control set speed memory is erased           Exterior Lamps    Headlamps    These switches control  these systems     e Headlamps     Taillamps  Parking Lamps    License Lamps    Sidemarker Lamps    Instrument Panel Lights    Press the LIGHTS switch to turn on the headlamps   Press 1t again to turn them off  When the headlamps are  turned on  the instrument panel lights will also turn on   The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be  adjusted with the PANEL LIGHTS switch to the left of  the steering column  Some lights will not dim during  daylight hours    Press the PARK switch to turn on the parking lamps   Press it again to tum t
14.     4 5 quarts  4 3 L   Or change with filter change  Fuel Tank                      18 gallons  68 L   Tire Pressures                  See Tire Loading  Information label on driver s door   Wheel Nut Torque            100  b ft  140 N m   Refrigerant  R 134a    Air Conditioning          See refrigerant charge    label under the hood   Note  All capacities are approximate  When adding  he    sure to fill to the appropriate level  as recommended in  this manual     6 61       Air Conditioning Refrigerants    Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same  If the  air conditioning system in your vehicle needs  refrigerant  be sure the proper refrigerant 15 used  If  you re not sure  ask your Buick dealer     Engine Specifications  3800 Series    Engine  1 36     VIN Engine Code             VEA aerate METRIS K  Toe ilu us EG ERIS EROR ERREUR Uoc NE  Displacement                              3 81   Horsepower                        TANG 205 hp  Firing Order    esee e A 120 2252    Thermostat Temperature             I957F  91  C     Normal Maintenance Replacement  Parts    Air Cleaner Filter               AC Type A 1096C    Engine Oil Filter              Type      47  Transaxle Filter              GM Fart       8651909  Windshield Wiper Blades    Pin Type                            22 Inches  56 cm   Spar PUGS                         Type 41 921            0 060 inch  1 52 mm     Vehicle Dimensions               212 clie Ra xa 200 inches  508 cm            PR TO        73 6 in
15.     L2   a    PARK  P   This locks your front wheels  Its the best  position to use when vou start your engine because your  vehicle can t move easily     It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the  shift lever is not fully in PARK       with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll   Don t leave vour vehicle when the engine is  running unless you have to  If you have left the    engine running  the vehicle can move suddenly   You or others could be injured  To be sure your  vehicle won t move  even when you re on fairly  level ground  always set your parking brake and  move the shift lever to PARK  P     See    Shifting Into PARK         in the Index  If  you re pulling a trailer  see    Towing a Trailer  in  the Index        Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK  P  range before  starting the engine  Your Buick has a Brake Transaxle  Shift Interlock  BTSI   You have to fully apply your  regular brakes before you can shift from PARK  P   when the ignition key is in the RUN position  If you  cannot shift out of PARK        ease pressure on the shift  lever and push the shift lever all the        into PARK  P        you maintain brake application  Then move the shift  lever into the gear you wish  See  Shifting Out of  PARK          in this part     REVERSE  R   Use this gear to back up     NOTICE       Shifting to REVERSE       while your vehicle is  moving forward could damage your transaxle   Shift to REVERSE       only after your vehicle  is stopped   
16.     Press the UNLOCK switch to allow passengers to use  their window switches again   Horn    Nearly the entire surface of the center pad of the  steering wheel is an active horn switch  Press anywhere  on the pad to sound the horn           A tilt steering wheel     wheel before vou drive     lows you te adjust the steering    You can also raise it to the highest level to give your  legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle     To tilt the wheel  hold the steering wheel and pull the  lever toward you  Move the steering wheel to a  comfortable level  then release the lever to lock the  wheel in place     The lever on the left side of the steering column  includes your        Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator       Headlamp High Low Beam Changer and  Passing Signal    Windshield Wipers    Windshield Washer    Cruise Control  il equipped     Turn and Lane Change Indicator    The turn signal has two upward  for right  and two  downward  for left  positions  These positions allow you  to signal a turn or a lane change           To signal    turn  move the lever all the way up or down   When the turn is finished  the lever will retum automatically     An arrow on the instrument     panel will flash in the  direction of the turn or   lane change        To signal a lane change  just raise or lower the lever  until the arrow starts to flush  Hold it there until you  complete your lane change  The lever will return by  itself when vou release it           If the arrows ju
17.     Q  If I m a good driver  and I never drive far from    home  why should I wear safety belts     You may be an excellent driver  but if you re in an  accident    even one that isn   t your fault     you and  vour passengers can be hurt  Being a good driver  doesn t protect you from things beyond your  control  such as bad drivers    Most accidents occur within 25 miles  40 km  of  home  And the greatest number of serious injuries  and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph    65 km h      Sulety belts are for everyone        How to Wear Safety Belts                   Adults    This part is only for people of adult size     Be aware that there are special things to know about safety  belts and children  And there are different rules for smaller  children and babies  If a child will be riding in your Buick   see the part of this manual called    Children     Follow those  rules for everyone s protection     First  you Il want to know which restraint systems your  vehicle has     We ll start with the driver position    Driver Position   This part deseribes the driver s restraint system   Lap Shoulder Belt   The driver has a lap shoulder belt  Here s how to wear  it properly    I  Close and lock the door     2  Adjust the seat  to see how  see  Seats  in the Index   so you can      up straight           Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you   Don t let it get twisted     Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks   Pull up on the latch plate to mak
18.    CR orsa Pesce ee 4 28  Comenng Lanes a         2 42 In Foreizn Countries                               6 4  Conte ENDS  ooo ero pp ase eee ary ee eR 2 44 Ij h   Pallio cese      EE err ET                     4  8  Courtesy Transportation                             8 6 NINE crea aa tor eem m rye e RO            4 16  Cnuse Coni  on oan get chr eer ci MUT TIT T MU Du EUER               eee ek ta EE RED 4 11  Cupholders       MARCO TERI gee ease  LATA KU laa        On Grades While Towing a Trailer                  4 39  Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users           8 4 On Hill and Mountain Roads         iind              4 24  Customer Assistance Information                     8 1 On Snow      LOG ajo                      mE ER Rn 4 27  Customer Satisfaction Procedure                       amp  2 Through Wallet                                aues en tm RU  WetHDMM                 4 18  Damage  Finish 4    vies          SUE      apes 6 52         iet SPESE IDE 4 26  Dimage Sheet Metil                       echo 6 52 Wis           eich a aden          4 37  Daytime Running Lamps                           2 42 Dune OT errors iar A ERA        4 3                       sis tee ee        3 3 Dual Automatic Comfor Temp Climate Control           3 3  Defects  Reporting                        2    re  Defogger Rear Window 20022000010 Eiesried               Adding    3 34  6 55  Defogging            Eri ETT                    M Electrical System hom 4o   ee                  
19.    FRONT defrost will work better if any ice or snow is  cleared from the hood and the air inlet area between the  hase of the windshield and the hood        3 6      Air Conditioning    On hot days  open the windows long enough to let hot  inside air escape  This reduces the time it takes for vour  vehicle to cool down  Then keep vour windows closed  for the air conditioner to work its best     lf you have the electronic touch system  for quick  coal down on very hot days  use MAX with the  temperature and fan speed adjusted to COOL and  HIGH  If this setting is used for long periods of time   the air in your vehicle may become too cold and dry     For normal cooling on hot days  use NORM and  adjust the temperature and fan speed for your comfort   If RECIRC is selected while in the NORM air  conditioning mode  the system works like MAX and  recirculates the air     On sunny days  when the air 18 moderately warm or  cool  use BI LEV to deliver warm air to the floor and  cooler air to the middle instrument panel outlets  On  days like these  the sun may adequately warm your  upper body  but your lower body may not be warm  enough  To warm or cool the air delivered  adjust the  TEMPERATURE lever        The amount of fresh air entering the vehicle is limited  when RECIRC is selected  This is helpful when vou  are trying to cool the air in your vehicle or limit the air  entering the vehicle     If vour vehicle has the Dual Automatic Comfortemp  system and it is set for AUTO  on 
20.    Remember  cleaning products can be hazardous  Some In many uses  these will damage vour vehicle   are toxic  Others can burst into flame 11 you strike a      s zu   Alcohol  match or get them en a hot part of the vehicle  Some are  dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space   When you use anything from a container to clean your     Buick  be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings    Laundry Soap    Bleach    Reducing Agents       6 46       11           Li  Cleaning the Inside of Your Buick  Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose  dirt  Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean  damp cloth   Your Buick dealer has two cleaners  a solvent type spot  litter and a foam type powdered cleaner  They will clean  normal spots and stains very well  Do not use them on  vinyl or leather   Here are some cleaning tips       Always read the instructions on the cleaner label   2  Clean up stains as soon as you can    before they set     3  Use a clean cloth or sponge  and change to a clean area  often  A soft brush may be used if stains are stubbom     4  Use solvent type cleaners in a well ventilated area  only  If you use them  don t saturate the stained area    5  Haring forms after spot cleaning  clean the entire  area immediately or it will set    Using Foam Type Cleaner on Fabric    1  Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt     ra    Always clean a whole trim panel or section  Mask  surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines    3  Mix Multi Pur
21.    eue e Ee eec poe 1 43  Front Drive Axle Boot occu ea ee es 22 1 43  Front Drive Axle Seal                    7 43  Radiator and Heater  Hose                        7 43                     vus denied              NH E 7 43                    ss             a  Alm cla  a s mu lava mee dt ata Rad 7 44  Throttle Linkage        27 42  Feet      aera ert           comets      in 2 34                                             acra ka rca e exa c an 2 44         MED 2    6 49                              s xd ak 2 56  2 57                 aeaa posite ais ce ce                   EX 2 44  J gebe odi AOL i ree he erate exa aceite PT ETE 5 24  Jump Starting phe cds ERNE                            Re  Lock Cylinders Service   Sarria      perse ET           Reminder              are 2 15  2 20           Entry      ory eens serere hn pet 2 0  Instant Alam         h 2 10  Personal Choice Features                         2 12  Resynchromzation               2 10  KEYS                 a                        Labels  LEY sgh Tp et  Al      isa eee ae 4 3   Service Parts Identification                       6 34  Tire Loading Information                        4 31  Vehicle Identification                                 6 54  Lamps   de ee ere ind          2 4   CEU                   UTE eee inet 2 44  Entry Lighting                      2  22    2          2          iore rra      diese        equ 43 V ad wn ea 2 41  Bait Lighting  Delayed        22 zii 2                     usar rr     
22.   A ROB OROR RO A dh od d B d 6 55  Defrosting               LO es                 3 0 Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror            2 48  Delayed Entry Lighting                                  es 2 44 Electronic Level Control                  E SE  Delayed Exit Lighting                             2 44 Electronic Touch Climate Control        EE ee              9 3                127 72  ety eee eee Reece 0 CE CIE 5 2 6 9  Accessory Belt         V3 Li aua e s OC        6 63  CONS SU             IIS Ici re TRIER QNSE TAE Y Y 6 19  Coolant Healet 1 22  ura ehm 2 22  Coolant Level Check    suc m mem 7 39  Coolant Temperature Gage                       2 63  Coolant Temperature Warning Light                2 65           SNNT DET TT EET             ELE ERES 2 31  Fuse Block  Driver s Side    foe                   6 57  Fuse Block  Pamenger a qoo                     6 59  Identification                                     68 34  Oil Level Check            POC er ere        7 39                             chr Een rm        5 13  Running While                                        2 32  SCTE                    runs Lu Yr ala Ra a end 6 62  Starting Your 2                                     2 21   Engine OE cece cede eee nr ance dee REM RR 6 10   ding       6 11  Prata e e nera M        S REID      6 13  Check iui  eeu Rhe ee RIPE An 6 10  Life Monitor    hmm TUERI 2 68  Pressure                                          2 68  Preszure Light our x 2 68              DU lala e
23.   Engine Specifications   Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts  Vehicle Dimensions    Service    Your Buick dealer knows your vehicle best and wants  you to be happy with it  We hope you ll go to your  dealer for all vour service needs  You ll get genuine GM  parts and GM trained and supported service people     We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM   Genuine GM parts have one of these marks        Doing Your Own Service Work    If you want to do some of your own service work  you ll  want to get the proper Buick Service Manual  It tells you  much more about how to service your Buick than this  manual can  To order the proper service manual  see     Service and Owner Publications  in the Index     Your vehicle has an air bag system  Before attempting to  do your own service work  see  Servicing Your Air  Bag Equipped Buick  in the Index    You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list  the mileage and the date of any service work you  perform  See  Maintenance Record  in the Index     You can be injured and your vehicle could be  damaged if you try to do service work on a  vehicle without knowing enough about it    e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge   experience  the proper replacement parts  and tools before vou attempt any vehicle  maintenance task    Be sure to use the proper nuts  bolts and  other fasteners     English    and    metric     fasteners can be easily confused  If you use  the wrong fasteners  parts can later break  or fall off  Y
24.   Replacing Parts After a Crash                     1 46  System Check i e eem eem 7 40  Reverse  Automatic Transaxle                       2 24  Right Front Passenger Position                      1 19  Roadside AssistancB        0  2    r6 rh eee 8 3  Roadside Assistance  Canadian                       875    Rocking Your Vehicle         e 5 36    Rotation  TES  ese eec rra nu                 6 40  Satery PIU Pu NE 1a    eke Cn ees RUSSE     1 46  Safety Belts                               6  6  1 5  Adults              MOL          eer mee ERE 1 11  CE                                          6 49  Center Passenger Position                        1 25                   2                           E rune EH 1 33  Driver Position                                                   1211                      A                         1 46  How to Wear Properly                           1 11  Incorrect Usage                      1 14  1 44  1 45                                                      1 25  Lap Shoulder  peepee en 1 11  1 27  Larger Children                2   2           1 43  Questions  and Answers    m    e 1710  Rear Comfort Guides                            1 30  Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions              1 27  Rear Seat Passengers 5  nnn 1 26  Reminder Light              1 6  2 59  Replacing Aftera Crash                           1 46  Right Front Passenger Position                    1 19  Shoulder Belt Height                                 1 13  Smal
25.   See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information    See footnote      Also see footnote         ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        87 000 Miles  145 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  whichever occurs first    Control Service   See footnote        3 months        Emission    AUTUAL MILEAGE     SERVICED BY         90 000 Miles  150 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every C  Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage  3 months  whichever occurs first   or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any  An Emission Control Service   See footnote     damage  Replace parts as needed        Lubricate chassis components  or every An Emission Control Service   See footnote T    6 months  whichever occurs first   C  Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and   See footnote     Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation      Replace air cleaner filter  pattern and additional information          Emission Control Service   See footnote        ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 24          93 000 Miles  155 000 km  96 000 Miles  160 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every     Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote            Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote         _  Rotat
26.   Setting the Tone    BASS  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease bass     TREB  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease treble  If a station is weak       noisy  you may want to decrease the treble     Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  you re not using them     TONE  This feature allows you to choose preset bass  and treble equalization settings designed for classical           rock  jazz  talk and country western stations   CLASS will appear on the display when you first press            Each time vou press it  another setting will  appear on the display  Press it again after C  amp  W  appears and MANUAL will appear  Tone control will  return to the BASS and TREB knobs  Also  if vou use  the BASS and TREB knobs  control will return to them  and MANUAL will appear     Adjusting the Speakers  BAL  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn this    knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers  The    middle position balances the sound between the  speakers    FADE  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn this  knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers   The middle position balances the sound berween the  speakers    Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  you re not using them     Plaving a Compact Disc    Insert a disc partway into the slot  label side up  The  plaver will pull it in  The disc should begin playing    lf you want to inser
27.   To assist customers who are deaf  hard of hearing  or  speech impuired and who use Text Telephones  TT Ys    Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer  Assistance Center  Any TTY user can communicate with  Buick by dialing  1 800 83 BUICK   TTY users in  Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830        Koadside Assistance       Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Premium  Roadside Assistance to customers for vehicles covered  under the 3 year 36 000 mile  60 000 Km  new car  warranty  whichever occurs first         Our commitment to Buick owners has always included   superior service through our network of 3 000 Buick   dealers  Buick Premium Roadside Assistance provides   an extra measure of convenience and security    Buick Premium Roadside Assistance       Provides owners with access to minor repairs or  towing for disabled vehicles       Takes the anxiety out of uncertain situations by  providing easy access to service professionals trained  to work with Buick owners  24 hours a day  365 days     year  including weekends and holidays        For details on Buick Premium Roadside Assistance   please consult your Buick Premium Roadside Assistance  owner booklet included with your owner s manual  For  needed assistance  call the Buick Premium Roadside  Assistance toll free hotline  1 800 252 1112     Canadian Roadside Assistance    Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive  Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere  in Canada or the United States  Plea
28.   Traction Control 5ystem Warning Light   Option       This warning light should  come on briefly as you start  the engine  If the warning  light doesn t come on then     have it fixed so it will be  ready to warn you if there s  a problem        TRACTION    OFF    If it stays       or comes on when you re driving  there  may be a problem with your traction control system and  your vehicle may need service  When this warning light  is on  the system will not limit wheel spin  Adjust your  driving accordingly     2 64    The traction control system warning light may come on  for the following reasons         l   you turn the system off by pressing the button  located to the left of the steering column  the  warning light will come on and stay on  To turn the  system back on  press the button again  The warning  light should go off   See    Traction Control System   in the Index for more information           if there s a brake system problem that is specifically  related to traction control  the traction control system  will turn off and the warning light will come       If  your brakes begin to overheat  the traction control  system will turn off and the warning light will come  on until your brakes cool down    e  f the traction control system is affected by an  engine related problem  the system will turn off and  the warning light will come on    If the traction control system warning light comes on   and stays on for an extended period of time when the   system is turned 
29.   When to Check Power Steering Fluid    It is not necessary to regularly check power steering           unless you suspect there is a leak in the system       you hear an unusual noise  A fluid loss in this system  could indicate    problem  Have the system inspected  and repaired     The power steering reservoir is located below the  generator and behind the accessory drive belt toward the  rear of the engine     How To Check Power Steering Fluid   When the engine compartment ts cool  wipe the cap and  the top of the reservoir clean  then unscrew the cap and  wipe the dipstick with    clean rag  Replace the cap and  completely tighten it  Then remove the cap again and  look at the fluid level on the dipstick    The level should be at the FULL COLD mark  If  necessary  add only enough fluid to bring the level up t    the mark     What to Use   To determine what kind of fTuid to use  see   Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  in the Index   Always use the proper fluid  Failure to use the proper  fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals              6 23    Windshield Washer           Open the cap labeled WASH      FLUID ONLY  Add  washer fluid until the tank is full   What to Use    When you need windshield washer fluid  be sure to read  the manufacturer s instructions before use  If you will be  operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature  may fall below freezing  use a fluid that has sufficient  protection against freezing     NOTICE     e When using concen
30.   check occasionally to be sure that the  load is secure  and that the lamps and any trailer brakes  are still working     Following Distance    Stay at least twice as Tar behind the vehicle ahead as you  would when driving your vehicle without a trailer  This         help you avoid situations that require heavy braking  and sudden turns     Passing    You ll need more passing distance up ahead when  you re towing a trailer  And  because you re a good deal  longer  you ll need to go much farther beyond the  passed vehicle before vou can return to your lane     Backing Up    Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand   Then  to move the trailer to the left  just move that hand  ta the left  To move the trailer to the right  move your  hand to the right  Always back up slowly and  if  possible  have someone guide you     Making Turns    NOTICE     Making very sharp turns while trailering could    cause the trailer to come in contact with the  vehicle  Your vehicle could be damaged  Avoid  making very sharp turns while trailering        When you re tuming with a trailer  make wider turns than  normal  Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders   curbs  road signs  trees or other objects  Avoid jerky or  sudden maneuvers  Signal well in advance     4 38    Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer    When you tow a trailer  your vehicle may need     different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring  Check  with your Buick dealer  The green arrows on your  instrument pa
31.   door and console door  Part D tells you what to use   More frequent lubrication may be required when  exposed lo    corrosive environment        Starter Switch Check Brake  Transaxle Shift Interlock  BTSI  Check    When you are doing this check  the vehicle could  move suddenly  If it does  vou or others could be  injured  Follow the steps below     When vou are doing this check  the vehicle could  move suddenly  If it does  vou or others could be  injured  Follow the steps below            Before vou start  be sure you have enough room 1  Before you start  be sure you have enough  around the vehicle  room around the vehicle  I should be parked on a    level surface     I    Firmly apply both the parking brake  see  Parking  Brake  in the Index tf necessary  and the regular brake  2  Firmly apply the parking brake  see  Parking Brake     NOTE  Do not use the accelerator pedal  and be in the Index if necessary       ready to tum off the engine immediately if it starts  NOTE  Be ready to apply the regular hrake    3  Try to start the engine in          gear  The starter immediately if the vehicle begins to move     should work only in PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  NJ  If 3  With the engine off  turn the key to the RUN   the starter works in any other position  your vehicle position  but don t start the engine  Without applying   needs service  the regular brake  try to move the shift lever out of  PARK  P  with normal effort  If the shift lever  moves      of PARK        your vehicle 
32.   it     2  What s wrong with this     You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is    too loose  In a crash  vou would move forward    too much  which could increase injury  The    shoulder belt should fit against your body            The shoulder belt is too loose  It won t give nearly       much protection this way            What s wrong with this     You can be seriously injured if vour belt is  buckled in the wrong place like this  In a crash     the belt would go up over your abdomen  The  helt forces would be there  not at the pelvic  bones  This could cause serious internal injuries   Always buckle your belt into the buckle   nearest vou            The belt is buckled in the wrong place            1 15    Q  What s wrong with this     You can be seriously injured if vou wear the  shoulder belt under your arm  In a crash  your  body would move too far forward  which would    increase the chance of head and neck injury   Also  the belt would apply too much force to the  ribs  which aren t as strong as shoulder bones   You could also severely injure internal organs  like vour liver or spleen            The shoulder belt is worn under the arm  It should  be worn over the shoulder at all times     arem aa e M              Q  What s wrong with this     You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt  In    a crash  vou wouldn t have the full width of the  belt to spread impact forces  If a helt is twisted   make it straight so it can work properly  or ask  your dealer
33.  3  ww 100    B   A7  d A Lum 10 2      d        AND 324                   2    OfLoo000 e    UNLEADED FUEL ONLY       Gage Cluster    Speedometer and Odometer    Your speedometer lets you see your speed      both miles  per hour  mph  and kilometers per hour  km h   Your  odometer shows how far vour vehicle has been driven   in either miles  used in the United States  or kilometers   used in Canada      Your Buick has a tamper resistant odometer  If you see  bright silver lines between the numbers  you ll know  that someone has probably tried to turn it back  The  numbers may not be true     You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs     new odometer installed  If the mew one can be set to the    mileage total of the old odometer  then it must       But if    it can t  then it s set at zero and    label must be put on  the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when  the new odometer was installed     Trip Odometer    A trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven  since vou last set it to zero  To reset it  push the button     Tachometer  If Equipped       The tachometer tells you  how fast the engine is  going  It displays  engine speed in  thousands of revolutions  per minute  rpm               n  1 TEE          f       Sj  ce       um  APM x OH        NOTICE             Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in  ihe red area or engine damage may occur           Warning Lights  Gages        Indicators    This part describes the warning lights an
34.  A child or others could be badly injured or  even killed     They could operate power windows or other  controls or even make the vehicle move  Don t  leave the keys in    vehicle with young children                       The ignition kevs are for the When a new LeSabre is delivered  the dealer removes           only  the plugs from the keys  and gives them to the first  owner  However  the ignition key may not have a plug   If the ignition key doesn t have a plug  it will have a  bar coded key tag     Each plug or tag has    code on it that tells your dealer or  a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys  Keep the  plugs or the tags in a safe place  If you lose your keys   you ll be able to have new ones made easily using these  plugs or the tag  If your ignition keys don t have plugs  or the tag  go to your Buick dealer for the correct key  code if you need a new ignition key           The door keys are for the  doors and all other locks  NOTICE     Your Buick has a number of features that can  help prevent theft  But vou can have a lot of    trouble getting into your vehicle if vou ever  lock vour kevs inside  You may even have to  damage vour vehicle to get in  50 be sure vou  have extra keys        Door Locks    Unlocked doors can be dangerous     Passengers    especially children    can easily  open the doors and fall out  When a door is  locked  the inside handle won t open it     Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked  door when you slow down or stop your v
35.  Control System               3  2  3 4 Transaxle Park Mechanism Cheb o ac  7 42   Alarm  Instant  Keyless Entry                       2 10 Automatic Dimming Outside                            2 40    Alarm  Universal Theft Deterrent                    2 16   Alignment and Balance  Tire                    vee 6 44 B      Aluminum Wheels  Cleaning                        6 51            sisse e n e eem eee nene B2B   Antenna  Heated Backlite                          3 36 Jump Starting                     tO E  3 3   A nif  cid LSU icm               CNN EE sat oa 6 19 Replacement  Remote Keyless Entry                2 12   Anti Lock Rundown                                           2 47  NE    ped e                m Rom 4 7 ee Light 1145 24 riui nien nnn E Ra gu  Brake System Warning Light                  2 63  4 7      2             2 2                          E   Anti Theft  Radio                                3 31 BBB Auto Line                                  8 7     ppearance                    6 46 Belt  Engine Accessory                            6 63   Appearance Care Materials                         6 53 Better Business Bureau Medion    nis iioii 5 7   Arbitration Program                                8 7 Blizzard  Driving In                          TRE Crece     4 28   9 1             Brake Change      Soon Light             CUI EVER UT EN    Adjustment         vem 6 28 Changing a Flat                             di ugue dead  Anti lock System Warning L ight   EC
36.  FULL HOT ora    improve the system  These can be harmful  little higher             6 21    Adding Coolant    lf you need more coolant  add the proper DEX COOL      coolant mixture af the coolant recovery tank  but be  careful not to spill it     Turning the radiator pressure cap when the  engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and    scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly   With the coolant recovery tank  you will almost    never have to add coolant at the radiator     Never turn the radiator pressure cap    even     little    when the engine and radiator are hot        6 22    You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  engine parts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol   and it will burn if the engine parts are hot         enough  Don t spill coolant on a hot engine        Radiator Pressure Cap    NOTICE     Your radiator cap is a 15 psi  105 kPa   pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to    prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage  from overheating  Be sure the arrows on the cap  line up with the overflow tube on the radiator  filler neck        When vou replace vour radiator pressure         an       cap is recommended        Thermostat    Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat  in the engine coolant system  The thermostat stops the  How of coolant through the radiator until the coolant  reaches a preset temperature     Power Steering Fluid    eog o    POWER  STEERING  DO MOT OVERFILL  USE ONLY  APPROVED  FLUID            
37.  Fluid L evel Check   7 39  Windshield Wiper uy ES        Ca e 2 36  Blade Cleaning       6 30  Blade Re imde arity atom e Re RECS Kr eS ie h 38  Fuses           6 55  hw agkoyncg HP              4 26  Wiper Blade Check                   CRT UU 7 41   Wiper Bhludes  Clasning 1 5    creer nmn 6 50  Wiring  Headlump EE       6 55                      Lacer trem moto rnnt ac eh 5 8           WRIT                             5 24       E 9 11    O Service Station Checkpoints                     BATTERY  TERMINAL  P5 6    ENGINE OIL  DIPSTICK         10        _          SECONDARY  HOOD RELEASE poc  run                    e 55   RELEASE    ENGINE COOLANT  RECOVERY TANK         PE S       22  WINDSHIELD  WASHER FLUID REMOTE TRUNK  PB 24 hrs    For detailed information  refer to the page number listed  or see the Index in the back of the owner s manual     9 12                         
38.  Periodic Maintenance Inspections   explains important inspections that your Buick dealer s  service department or another qualified service center  should perform        Part D  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  lists  some products GM recommends to help keep vour  vehicle properly maintained  These products  or their  equivalents  should be used whether vou do the work  yourself or have it done        Part E  Maintenance Record    provides a place for  you to record the maintenance performed on your  vehicle  Whenever any maintenance is performed  be  sure to write it down in this part  This will help vou  determine when your next maintenance should      done   In addition  it is a good idea to keep your maintenance  receipts  They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for  warranty repairs     Part     Scheduled Maintenance  Services  Using Your Maintenance Schedule    We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle  in good working condition  But we don t know exactly  how you ll drive it  You may drive very short distances  only a few times a week  Or you may drive long distances  all the time in very hot  dusty weather  You may use your  vehicle in making deliveries  Or you may drive it to work   to do errands or in many other ways     Because of all the different ways people use their GM  vehicles  maintenance needs vary  You may even need  more frequent checks and replacements than you ll find  in the schedules in this section  So please read this  section an
39.  SERVICED BY             Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule    27 000 Miles  45 000 km  30 000 Miles  50 000 km    _  Change engine oil and filter  or every L  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote            Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first       See footnote fi      C Replace air cleaner filter   An Emissiom Control Service     ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY        7 12       33 000 Miles  55 000 km     _  Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage L  Change engine oil and filter  or every  or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any 3 months  whichever occurs first    damage  Replace parts as needed  An Emission Control Service   See footnote        An Emission Control Service   See footnote 7          Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote               36 000 Miles  60 000       39 000 Miles  65 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every C  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote        C Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote sf           Rotate tires  See 
40.  TREB knobs  control will return to them  and MANUAL will appear        Adjusting the Speakers    BAL  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers   The middle position balances the sound between  the speakers     FADE  Press this knob lightly so tt extends  Turn the  knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers   The middle position balances the sound between the  speakers     Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  you re not using them     Plaving a Cassette Tape    The longer side with the tape visible should face to the  right  If the ignition and the radio are on  the tape can be  inserted and will begin playing  If you hear nothing or  hear a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely   Press EJECT to remove the tape and stan over    While the tape 15 playing  use the VOLUME  FADE   BAL  BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the  radio  Other controls may have different functions when  a tape is inserted  The display will show an arrow to  show which side of the tape is playing     3 27    Il you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio  is off  first press EJECT or RECALL     Your tape bias is set automatically     II E and a number appear on the radio display  the tape  won t play because of un error     e       The tape is tight and the player can t turn  the tape hubs  Remove the tape  Hold the tape with  the open end down and try to turn the right hub  counterclockwise
41.  The condition  will usually be corrected when the electrical system  dries out  A few driving trips should turn the light off     Have you recently changed brands of fuel     If so  be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel  see   Fuel  in the Index   Poor fuel quality will cause vour  engine not to run as efficiently as designed  You may  notice this as stalling after start up  stalling when you put  the vehicle into gear  misfiring  hesitation on acceleration  or stumbling      acceleration   These conditions may go  away once the engine is warmed up   This will be detected  by the system and cause the light to          on     If you experience one or more of these conditions   change the fuel brand vou use  It will require at least  one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off     If none of the above steps have made the light turn off   have your dealer or qualified service center check the  vehicle  Your dealer has the proper test equipment and  diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical  problems thai muy have developed                    2 67    Oil Pressure Light Gage e If you re    idling    at a stop sign  the light may blink    on and then off     e  f you make a hard stop  the light may come on for     moment     But  when this light comes on and stays on  it means oil  isn t going through your engine properly  You could be  low on       or you might have some other oil problem   See your dealer for service        Standard Cluster Gage Cl
42.  Time Delay    The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which  prevents unnecessary switching from the night to the  day position  This delay prevents rapid changing of the  mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic     Reverse Gear Day Mode    The reverse day mode is another important feature  of the electrochromic mirror  When you shift into  REVERSE       the mirror changes to the day made   This gives you a bright image in the mirror as vou  hack up     Cleaning the Photocells    Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the  photocells when necessary     Manual Remote Control Mirror    ES To adjust the driver s  r side outside mirror  rotate  the knob located on the  driver s door  The right  outside mirror must be  adjusted manually        The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you  can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting  in a comfortable driving position     To adjust your passenger s side mirror  sit in the driver s  seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you          2 49    Power Remote Control Mirrors   If Equipped        If your Buick has the  outside power remote  mirrors  the contral is  located on the driver s door     Move the switch in the middle of the control to choose  the right or left mirror  Push the arrow controls in the  direction you want to move the mirror     Adjust each mirror so you can just see the side of your  vehicle and the area behind your vehicle     t gt   un       Automatic Dimmi
43.  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote      Also see footnote            DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE    ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY     SERVICED BY        7 14          42 000 Miles  70 000 km      _  Change engine oil and filter  or every   3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service   See footnote         Lubricate chassis components  or every   6 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote           Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote        45 000 Miles  75 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote          Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving  in dusty conditions  Replace filter if  necessary       Emission Control Service   See footnote            48 000 Miles  80 000 km          Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Contral Service   See footnote        C  Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote       C Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote      Also see footnote         50 000 Miles  83 000 km          Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter    if the vehicle is mainly drive
44.  Vehicle  in the Index        In very cold weather           18  C  or colder  the engine  coolant heater        help  You ll get easier starting and  better fuel economy during engine warm up  Usually   the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of  four hours prior to starting your vehicle     To Use the Coolant Heater      Turn off the engine     Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord     3  Plug it into a normal  grounded 110 volt AC outlet     Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet  could cause an electrical shock  Also  the wrong  kind of extension cord could overheat and cause    a fire  You could be seriously injured  Plug the  cord into a properly grounded three prong  I10 volt AC outlet  If the cord won t reach  use     heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for  at least 15 amps           4  Betore starting the engine  be sure to unplug and store    the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving  engine parts  If you don t  it could be damaged     How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged  in  The answer depends on the outside temperature  the  kind of eil you have  and some other things  Instead of  trying to list everything here  we ask that you contact  your Buick dealer in the area where you ll be parking  your vehicle  The dealer can give you the best advice for  that particular area     Automatic Transaxle Operation    Pak RNOS 21       Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever located on the  steering column          
45.  again   The system will then operate for five minutes hefore  going off by itself    Do not attach a temporary vehicle license  tape or decals  across the defogger erid on the rear window     NOTICE     Don t use a razor blade or something else sharp  on the inside of the rear window  If you do  you  could cut or damage the warming grid or the           integrated rear window antenna  and the repairs  wouldn t he covered by vour warranty        mmm    Passenger Control Steering Wheel Controls for Climate  Control  If Equipped     If you have the Dual  Automatic Comfortemp  system  the front seal  passenger can control the  air temperature in their  seating area        If your vehicle has this     feature  you can control the  temperature function by  using the button on your  steering wheel  Press the  TEMP up arrow to increase  the temperature and the  TEMP down arrow to  decrease the temperature        The temperature can be set up to 5  F    15  C  cooler  or warmer than the primary setting  To activate the  passenger control  simply press the COOL or WARM  buttons located on the passenger s door     The indicator lights above the control will show the  difference from the main temperature setting   If the passenger control has been turned on  it can be    turned off by pressing the OFF button once  Pressing the  OFF button a second time will turn off the main system        Audio Systems    Your Delco    audio system has been designed to operate  easily and give years of 
46.  as necessary  only when work 18  done on the brake hydraulic system      N CAUTION     If vou have too much brake fluid  it can spill on the  engine  The fluid will burn if the engine is hot  enough  You or others could be burned  and your     vehicle could he damaged  Add brake fluid only  when work is done on the brake hydraulic system        When your brake fluid falls to a low level  your brake  warning light will come       A chime will sound if you  iry to drive with this warning light on  See  Brake  system Warning Light  in the Index     What to Add    When you do need brake fluid  use only DOT 3 brake NOTICE    fluid    such as Delco Supreme 117  GM Part         12377967   Use new brake fluid from a sealed    Using the wrong fluid can badly damage  container only  brake system parts  For example  just a few    drops of mineral based oil  such as engine  oil  in your brake system can damage brake  system parts so badly that they ll have to be    Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area  around the cap before removing it  This will help keep  dirt from entering the reservoir    replaced  Don t let someone put in the    wrong kind of fluid    If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s  painted surfaces  the paint finish can be  damaged  Be careful not to spill brake fluid  on your vehicle  If vou do  wash it off  immediately  See  Appearance Care  in  the Index     With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake    system  your brakes may not work well  or th
47.  asphalt will stain if left  on a vehicle s seat fabric  They should be removed as    soon as possible  Be careful  because the cleaner will  dissolve them and may cause them to spread     Non Greasy Stains    Stains caused by catsup  coffee  black   egg  fruit  fruit  juice  milk  soft drinks  wine  vomit  urine and blood can  be removed as follows     1  Carefully scrape off excess stain  then sponge the  soiled area with cool water     2        stain remains  follow the foam type instructions  described earlier     3  If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine  treat  the area with a water baking soda solution  1  teaspoon  5 ml  of baking soda to 1 cup  250 ml  of  lukewarm water     4  If needed  clean lightly with solvent type cleaner   Combination Stains    Stains caused by candy  ice cream  mayonnaise  chili  sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows         Carefully scrape off excess stain     na      Clean with cool water and allow to dry    3  Ifa stain remains  clean it with solvent type cleaner   Cleaning Vinyl   Use warm water and a clean cloth        Rub with a clean  damp cloth to remove dirt  You  may have to do it more than once      Things like tar  asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you  don t get them off quickly  Use a clean cloth and a  vinyl leather cleaner  See your dealer for this product        6 48      Cleaning Leather    Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or    saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth  Then 
48.  either the maximum front or rear  GAWR  If you do  parts on your vehicle can break   or it can change the way vour vehicle handles   These could cause you to lose control  Also     overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle     NOTICE     Your warranty does not cover parts or  components that fail because of overloading     If you put things inside your vehicle    like suitcases   tools  packages  or anything else     they will go as fast  as the vehicle goes  If you have to stop or turn quickly   or if there is a crash  they ll keep going           Things you put inside vour vehicle can strike and   injure people in a sudden stop or turn  or in      crash    e Put things in the trunk of your vehicle  In a  trunk  put them as far forward as you can      Try to spread the weight evenly    Never stack heavier things  like suitcases   inside the vehicle so that some of them are  above the tops of the seats    Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in  your vehicle    When vou carry something inside the  vehicle  secure it whenever you can     Electronic Level Control  If Equipped     This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the  load changes  It is automatic    you do not need to  adjust anything     Towing a Trailer    If you don t use the correct equipment and drive  properly  vou can lose control when vou pull a  trailer  For example  if the trailer is too heavy  the    brakes may not work well    or even at all  You  and your passengers could be seriousl
49.  flow through the windshield and side  window outlets  The air conditioning compressor is not  working when HTR is selected     BLEND  When BLEND is selected  the airflow will be  split between the windshield and the floor outlets  The  air conditioning compressor will be operating     FRONT  This setting directs most of the airflow toward  the windshield     OFF  The ventilation system always allows fresh air to  flow through your Buick when the vehicle is moving   The system will try to keep the air at a previously  chosen temperature  When the system is off  the blower  fan is also off    MAX  This setting directs airflow through the middle  instrument panel outlets  The amount of outside air  entering your vehicle is limited with this setting  The air  conditioning compressor is on in this mode        NORM  This setting cools the outside air entering your  vehicle and directs it through the middle instrument  panel outlets  The air conditioner is on in this mode     BI LEV  This setting directs warm air to the floor and  cooler air to the middle instrument panel outlets  The  air conditioner is on in this mode     Dual Automatic ComforTemp  Climate Control  If Equipped     If your Buick has the Dual Automatic Comfaortemp  Climate Control option  the following information tells  you how it works     You will hear a beep each time a button is pushed and a  light on the button will indicate which function is active   The lights are on all buttons except TEMP  FAN and  AIR FL
50.  in   906  And a Buick was the first car to travel across  South America  driven from Buenos Aires  Argentina   over the Andes to Santiago  Chile in 1914        191  Model 21 Touring Car on Buicks Test Hill          Buick drew plenty of attention because it could climb  hills and run through mud like no other car  Buick s  endurance and reliability were world famous    During World War I  Buick built Liberty aircraft engines  as well as Red Cross ambulances so successfully that  one Buick ambulance was awarded the Croix de Guerre  hy the French government     As a builder of premier automobiles  Buick was hard hit  by the Great Depression  However  new General  Manager Harlow H  Curtice created popular new models  including the Special and the Roadmaster  Buick sales  soon flourished        First Buick Factory    In World War     Buick built aircraft engines  tanks and  other military hardware  This post war period brought  great styling and engineering changes which resulted in  increased sales  The torque converter automatic  transmission  Dynaflow  was introduced in the 1948  Roadmaster  Buick s famous  portholes  came along        1949                              SAL       y    i       A high compression V 8 engine was introduced in 1953   And Buick s famous vertical pillar    toothy    grille   introduced in 1942  became more massive in the  post war               1953 Skylark    Motor Trend magazine named the 1962 Buick Special   Car of the Year   The first production 
51.  intake hose that is snapped over the  throttle body by pulling the hose upward and away  from the throttle body which 15 located near the top  of the engine  After detaching the hose from the  throttle body  pull back the entire rear portion of the  air cleaner by pulling upward and rearward        4  Replace the air filter   5  Reinstall the rear section of the air cleaner     6  Reattach the air intake hose by snapping it back onto  the throttle body     Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to  replace the air filter     See    Scheduled Maintenance Services    in the Index     Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can  cause you or others to be burned  The air cleaner  not only cleans the air  it stops flame if the engine  backfires  If it isn   t there  and the engine  backfires  you could be burned  Don t drive with  it off  and be careful working on the engine with  the air cleaner off     NOTICE     If the air cleaner is off  a backfire can cause a  damaging engine fire  And  dirt can easily get  into your engine  which will damage it  Always  have the air cleaner in place when you re driving        Automatic Transaxle Fluid  When to Check and Change    A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid  level is when the engine oil is changed     Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles    83 000 km  if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or   more of these conditions    e Inheavy city traffic where the outside temperature  regul
52.  let the   leather dry naturally  Do not use heat to dry       For stubborn stains  use a leather cleaner  See your  dealer for this product        Never use oils  varnishes  solvent based or abrasive  cleaners  furniture polish or shoe polish on leather       Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned    immediately  If dirt ts allowed to work into the  finish  it can harm the leather     Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel    Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces  of the instrument panel  Sprays containing silicones or  waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield  and even make it difficult to see through the windshield  under certain conditions     Care of Safety Belts    Keep belts clean and dry     Do not bleach or dye safety belts  If you do  it    may severely weaken them  In a crash  they  might not be able to provide adequate protection   Clean safety belts only with mild soap and  lukewarm water        Cleaning Glass Surfaces  Glass should be cleaned otten  GM Glass Cleaner  GM  Part No  1050427  or a liquid household glass cleaner    will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust Films on  interior glass     Don   t use abrasive cleaners on glass  because they may  cause scratches  Avoid placing decals on the inside rear  window  since they may have to be scraped off later  If  abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear  window  an electric defogger element may be damaged   Any temporary license should not be attached across t
53.  of the cover  has a chart that explains the features arid controls  governed hy each fuse and relav     Fuses and Circuit Breakers    The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  short circuits by a combination of fuses  circuit breakers  and fusible thermal links  This greatly reduces the  chance of damage caused by electrical problems    Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse  If the  band is broken or melted  replace the fuse  Be sure vou  replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size  and rating     6 56    If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a  spare fuse  you can    borrow    one that has the same  amperage  Just pick some feature of your vehicle that  you can get along without     like the radio or cigarette  lighter    and use its fuse  if it is the correct amperage   Replace it as soon as you can    There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle  the driver s  side and passenger s side fuse blocks        Driver s Side Fuse Block The driver s side fuse block is to the left of the steering  wheel  under the instrument panel     Snap off the cover to reveal the fuses  You ll find a fuse  puller clipped to the inside of the cover  Place the wide  end of the fuse puller over the plastic end of the fuse   Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out     Spare fuses are located in the slots labeled  Spare  on  the following chart        When finished  replace the cover by snapping it back up  into place        Fuse Usage      No
54.  oil and filter every  7 500 miles  12 500 km  or 12 months    whichever  occurs first  Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed  engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to  break down slower      See    Change Oil Indicator  in the Index      What to Do with Used Oil    Did you know that used engine oil contains certain  elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could  even cause cancer  Don t let used oil stay on your skin  for very long  Clean your skin and nails with soap and  water  or a good hand cleaner  Wash or properly throw  away clothing or rags containing used engine oil   See  the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal  of oil products      Used oil can be a real threat to the environment  If you  change your own oil  be sure to drain all free flowing oil  from the filter before disposal  Don t ever dispose of oil       putting it in the trash  pouring it on the ground  into  sewers  or into streams or hodies of water  Instead   recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil  I  you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil   ask your dealer  a service station      a local recycling  center for help     6 13    Air Cleaner  The air cleaner and filter are on the driver s side of the  engine compartment        l  Remove the Powertrain Control Module  PCM   cover that is located to the driver s side of the air  cleaner assembly  Unscrew the retaining screws and  remove the PCM cover        6 14             Remove the air
55.  person use the manual or power  lock  When the door is closed again  it will not lock  automatically  Just use the manual or power lock to lock  the door again  If you need to lock your doors before  shifting out of PARK         just use the manual or power  lack button to lock the doors     Personal Choice Programming    If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry   you can program the memory door locks feature to  change to the following modes     Mode Operation     No automatic door lock or unlack          doors automatically lock when    shifted out of PARK  P   No automatic  door unlack     na         doors automatically lock when  shifted out of PARK         Only the  driver s door automatically unlocks  when shifted into PARK           3      doors automatically lock when  shifted out of PARK  P   All doors  automatically unlock when shifted into  PARK  P      Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 3     2 6    Use the following procedure to change modes                    Clase all doors and turn the ignition       Keep all  doors closed throughout this procedure     Press and hold the driver s power door lock switch  through Step 4    Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry  transmitter  The automatic door locks will remain in  the current mode     Press the LOCK button on the transmitter again   Each time the transmitter s LOCK button ts pressed   the mode will advance by         going from 3 to U to     elc     Release the power door lock sw
56.  straight out of the assembly    4  Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out   Replace with    new bulb by pushing the bulb straight  into the socket until the bulb clicks into place         Turn the bulb socket one quarter turn into the  assembly to lock it back into place     Headlamp Aiming    Your vehicle has the composite headlamp system  These  headlamps have horizontal and vertical aim indicators   The aim has been pre set at the factory and should need  no further adjustment     If your vehicle is damaged      an accident and the  headlamp aim seems to be affected  see your Buick  dealer  Headlamps on damaged vehicles may require  recalibration of the horizontal aim by your Buick dealer        To check the aim  the vehicle should be properly   prepared as follows    e The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly  level surface    e The vehicle should not          any snow         or mud  attached to it    e There should not be any cargo or loading of the  vehicle  except it should have a full tank of gas and  one person or 160 Ibs   75 kg  on the driver s seat     Tires should be properly inflated     The horizontal indicator should read 11 7    NOTICE     To make sure your headlamps are aimed    properly  read all the instructions before  beginning  Failure to follow these instructions  could cause damage to headlamp parts        State inspection stations will allow a vertical reading of  plus 0 76 degrees or minus 0 76 degrees from the center    of the 
57.  than sequential  order  Press RAND  again to turn off random play     RECALL  Press this button to see which track is  playing  Press it again within five seconds to see how  long it has been playing  To change what is normally  shown on the display  track or elapsed time   press the  button until you see the display you want  then hold the  button until the display flashes                Press this button to play the radio when a disc  is in the player     SOURCE  Press this button to change to the disc  function when the radio is on  When a disc i5 inserted   the disc will play until you press AM FM  Then the disc  will stop playing and the radio will play  Press SOURCE  again to play a disc again  CD PLAY will show on the  display     EJECT  Press this button to remove the dise  The radio  will plav     If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the  player  it will stay in the player  When you turn on the  ignition or system  the disc will start playing where it  stopped  if it was the last selected audio source  If you  leave    compact disc in the player while listening to the  radio  it may become warm        AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and  Compact Disc Player and Automatic  Tone Control    apunte AMF       Playing the Radio    VOLUME  Press this knob to turn the system      and  off  To increase volume  turn the knob clockwise  Tum  it counterclockwise to decrease volume     RECALL  Press this button briefly to recall the station  being played or to di
58.  than you would on dry  pavement  See    Anti Lock    in the Index        Allow greater following distance on any  slippery road        Watch for slippery spots  The road might be fine  until you hit    spot that   s covered with ice  On an  otherwise clear road  ice patches may appear in  shaded areas where the sun can t reach  around  clumps of trees  behind buildings      under bridges   Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass         remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear  If  you see a patch of ice ahead of you  brake before you         on it  Try not to brake while you re actually on  the ice         avoid sudden steering maneuvers     4 28    If You re Caught in a Blizzard          If you are stopped by heavy snow  you could be in a  serious situation  You should probably stay with your  vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help  und you can hike through the snow  Here are some  things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your  passengers safe        Tum on your hazard flashers     e Tie a red cloth to vour vehicle to alert police that  you ve been stopped by the snow     e Put on extra clothing or wrap    blanket around you   If you have no blankets or extra clothing  make body  insulators from newspapers  burlap bags  rags  floor  mats    anything you can wrap around yourself or  tuck under your clothing to keep warm           You can run the engine to keep warm  but be careful     4 29    Snow        trap exhaust gases under your
59.  that button     uh    6  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     P SCAN  Press this button to listen to each of your  preset stations for a few seconds  The radio will go to  the first preset station  stop for a few seconds  then go  on to the next preset station  Press P SCAN again to stop  scanning  H    preset station has weak reception  the  radio will nor stop ar the preset station        AUTO SET  Press this button and the system will seek  and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM  stations on your preset buttons  AUTO SET will flash  while secking and will remain on until this function is  complete  To return to the stations vou manually set   press AUTO SET again     setting the Tone    BASS  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increuse or decrease bass               Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease treble  If a station is weak  or noisy  you may want to decrease the treble     Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  you re not using them     TONE  This feature allows you to choose preset bass  and treble equalization settings designed for classical   pop  rock  jazz  talk and country western stations   CLASS will appear on the display when you first press  TONE  Each time you press it  another setting will  appear on the display  Press it again after C  amp  W  appears and MANUAL will appear  Tone control will  return to the BASS and TREB knobs  Also  if you use  the BASS and
60.  the   trailer adds considerably to wind resistance  increasing   the pulling requirements    If You Do Decide To Pull 4 Trailer   If vou do  here are some important points        There are many different laws  including speed limit  restrictions  having to do with trailering  Make sure  your rig will be legal  not only where you live bul  also where you ll be driving  A good source for this  information can be state or provincial police     e Consider using    sway control  You can ask a hiteh  dealer about sway controls     e Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles   1 600 km  your new vehicle is driven  Your engine   axle or other parts could be damaged     e Then  during the first 500 miles  800 kr  that you  tow a trailer  don t drive over 50 mph  80 km h  and  don t make starts at full throttle  This helps your  engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the  heavier loads        Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer   Don t drive faster than the maximum posted speed  for trailers  or no more than 55 mph  90 km h   to           wear on your vehicle s parts    Three important considerations have to do with weight       ihe weight of the trailer        ihe weight of the trailer tongue       and the total weight on your vehicle s tires        Weight of the Trailer  How heavy can a trailer safely be     It should never weigh more than 1 000 Ibs   450        But  even that can be too heavy     It depends on how you plan to use your rig  F
61.  the mirror so vou can see clearly behind your  vehicle  The day night adjustment on the bottom of the  mirror allows you to adjust rhe mirror to avoid glare  trom the headlamps behind you     Day Night Manual Rearview Mirror Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror  With Integral Reading Lamps  If Equipped    If Equipped        Your Buick may have an automatic electrochromic  day night rearview mirror        This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from  headlamps behind you  A photocell on the back of the  When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position  mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside  Another  adjust the mirror so you        see clearly behind your photocell built into the mirror surface senses when  vehicle  The day night adjustment allows you to adjust the headlamps are behind you    mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you    The integral reading lamps are turned on or off by   pressing the toggle switch at the bottom of the mirror     These lamps are also part of the courtesy lamps  described earlier in this section     2 48         At night  when the glare ts too high  the mirror will  gradually darken to reduce glare  this change may take     lew seconds   The mirror will return to its clear daytime  state when the glare is reduced     Press the button at the base of the mirror to turn on the  automatic feature  The button has an indicator light to  show it is on  Press the button again to turn the  automatic feature ott    
62.  the weights are  proper  If they aren t  vou may be able to get them right  simply      moving some items around in the trailer     Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires    Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit  for cold tires  You ll find these numbers on the Tire  Loading Information label located at the rear edge of the  driver s door or see  Loading Your Vehicle  in the Index   Then be sure you don t go over the GWW limit for your  vehicle  including the weight of the trailer tongue     4 36    Hitches    Its important to have the correct hitch equipment   Crosswinds  large trucks going by and rough roads are i  few reasons why you ll need the right hitch  Here are  some rules to follow        The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for  hitches  Do not attach rental hitches or other  bumper type hitches to them  Use only     frame mounted hitch that does not attach to  the bumper        Will you have to make        holes in the body of your  vehicle when you install a trailer hitch  If you do   then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove  the hitch  If you don t seal them  deadly carbon  monoxide  CO  from your exhaust can get into your  vehicle  see  Carbon Monoxide    in the Index   Dirt  and water         too        Safety Chains    You should always attach chains between your vehicle  and your trailer  Cross the safety chains under the tongue  of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road  if it becomes separated fro
63.  to fall while you are driving  The  surface may get wer suddenly when your reflexes are  tuned for driving on dry pavement        The heavier the rain  the harder it is to see  Even if your  windshield wiper blades are in good shape  a heavy rain  can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals   pavement markings  the edge of the road and even  people walking     Its wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in  good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled  with washer fluid  Replace your windshield wiper  inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing  areas on the windshield  or when strips of rubber start to  separate from the inserts             Wet brakes can cause accidents  They won t work  as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to  one side  You could lose control of the vehicle   After driving through a large puddle of water or    acar wash  apply your brake pedal lightly until  vour brakes work normally     a             Se ira         arua uu e E Tb       e             rare       Driving too fast through large water puddles or even  going through some car washes can cause problems  too   The water may affect your brakes  Try to avoid puddles   But if you can t  try to slow down before you hit them     4 19                                   Hydroplaning is dangerous  So much water can build up  under your tires that they can actually ride on the water   This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re  going fast enough  Whe
64.  to fix it            The belt is twisted across the body     ee     Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy    Safety belts work for everyone  including pregnant  women  Like all occupants  they are more likely to be  seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts        To unlatch the belt  just push the button on the buckle   The belt should go back out of the way     Before you close the door  be sure the belt is out of the    way  If you slam the door on it  you can damage both the  belt and your vehicle        A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt  and  the lap portion should be worn as low as possible  below  the rounding  throughout the pregnancy     1 18          The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  mother  When a safetv belt is worn properly  it s more  likely that the fetus won t be hurt      a crash  For  pregnant women  as for anyone  the key to making  safety belts effective is wearing them properly     Right Front Passenger Position    The right front passenger s safety belt works the same  way as the driver s safety belt  See  Driver Position      earlier in this section     When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the  way  it will lock  If it does  let it go back all the way and  start again     If your vehicle has a center passenger position  be sure  to use the correct buckle when buckling your  lap shoulder belt  If you find that the latch plate will not  go fully into the buckle  see if you are using the buckle  lor the c
65.  vehicle   This can cause deadly CO  carbon monoxide  gas  to get inside  CO could overcome you and kill  you  You can t see it or smell it  so you might not  know it is in vour vehicle  Clear away snow from    around the base of your vehicle  especially         that is blocking your exhaust pipe  And check  around again from time to time to be sure snow  doesn t collect there     Open a window just a little on the side of the  vehicle that s away from the wind  This will help  keep CO out        Run your engine only as long as you must  This saves  fuel  When you run the engine  make it go a little faster  than just idle  That is  push the accelerator slightly  This  uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the  battery charged  You will need a well charged battery to  restart the vehicle  and possibly for signaling later on  with your headlamps  Let the heater run for awhile     Then  shut the engine off and close the window almost  all the way to preserve the heat  Start the engine again  and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable  from the cold  But do it as little as possible  Preserve the  fuel as long as you can  To help keep warm  you can get       of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises  every half hour or so until help comes        Loading Your Vehicle    n TIRE LOADING INFORMATION    LJ OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP  WT     FRT  CTR  HH TOTAL LBS KG    MAX  LOADING  amp  GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE    CAPACITY WEIGHT        COLD TIRE  TIRE S
66.  with a pencil  Turn the tape over  and repeat  If the hubs do not turn easily  your tape         be damaged and should not be used in the  player  Try a new tape to make sure your player 15  working properly     e Ell  The tape is broken  Try a new tape     lf any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be  corrected  please contact your dealer  If your radio  displays an error number  write it down and provide it  to your dealer when reporting the problem     PREV  1   Press this button to search for the previous    selection on the tape  Your tape must have at least three    seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to  work  The sound will mute while seeking     NEXT  2   Press this button to search for the next  selection on the tape  Your tape must have at least  three seconds of silence between each selection for  NEXT to work  The sound will mute while seeking     The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the  previous and next selections on the tape     4413   Press this bution to reverse the tape rapidly   Press it again to return to plaving speed  The radio  will play while the tape reverses          idi  Press this button to advance quickly to  another part of the tape  Press the button again to  return to playing speed  The radio will play while the           advances     SIDE  5   Press this button to change the side of the           that is playing     RAND  6   Press this button to reduce background  noise when playing a cassette tape  The doubl
67.  your  radio s P SCAN hutton and allows you to listen to each  of your preset stations for    few seconds  The radio will       to the first preset station  stop for a few seconds  then          zo on to the next preset station  Press SCAN again to  stop scanning  If a preset station has weak reception  the  radio will not stop at the preset station                Press this button ta choose              or FM2     VOL  Press the up or  down arrow to increase  or decrease volume     SRCE  If you have radio only controls  you will have  this control  Press SRCE to play    cassette tape or  compact dise when the radio is playing  If both a tape  and disc are installed  the system wall first gc to tape  play  Press SRCE again to go to disc play     MUTE  If you have radio only controls  you will have  this control  Press MUTE to silence the system  Press it  again to turn on the sound     3 33    Understanding Radio Reception    FM Stereo   FM stereo will give you the best sound  But      signals  will reach only about 10 to 40 miles  16 to 65 km   Tall  buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals  causing  the sound to come and go     AM    The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM   especially at night  The longer range  however  can  cause stations to interfere with each other  AM can pick  up noise from things like storms and power lines  Try    reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it     Tips About Your Audio System    Hearing damage fro
68. 1997 LE SABRE     9   The 1997 Buick LeSabre Owner s Manual       1 1 Seats and Restraint Systems  This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly  It also explains the    SRS    system     2 1 Features and Controls  This section explains how t   start and operate your Buick     3 1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems  This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system     4 1 Your Driving and the Road  Here you ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how ro drive under different conditions     5 1 Problems on the Road  This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving  such as a flat tire or overheated engine  etc     6 1 Service and Appearance Care  Here the manual tells you how to keep your Buick running properly and looking good     7 1 Maintenance Schedule  This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use     8 1 Customer Assistance Information  This section tells you how to contact Buick for assistance and how to get service and owner publications   It alsa gives you information on  Reporting Safety Defects  on page 8 8     9 1 Index  Here s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual  You can use it to quickly Find  something vou want to read        BLICK         GENERAL MOTORS  GM  the GM Emblem  BUICK   the BUICK Emblem and the name LESABRE are  registered trademarks of General Motors Corp
69. 2 45                              2 44             os oo cre cps        Glee ered Rome x                 2 47  Perimeter    oan dac Er LL LII 2 45       Theater LAMME cue        2 44  Lesving Your Vehicle i s nin ey see cen                   T   e  Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running  2       2 29  Light Sensor  Twilight Sentinel                      24                                    ebay hes Ov eae ewes ted 2 52  Lights   Air Bag Resdiness                         1720  2 00   Anti Lock Brake System Warning              2 63  4 7   Hateiy WRC rrcecenccenre rk nied   2 01   Brake System Warning iiaa 0 00 0 00 4                             Change               oe pp cnc ee RE AERE                    LB cs        PPP TU TA ET A        TE TY 2 66   CENE ODD Li pL a                        2 69   Engine Coolant Temperature Waming               2 03   Engine      Pressure Light                        2 68   Low Fuel       pM EA ET AME 2 71        Pressure      rte A E di 44 224524 2 88   Safety Belt Reminder   pacha   1 6  2 59   Traction Control System Warning AR inp Tr 1 64  4 0   Traction Off Wiring   cem Rene ne 4 9  Loading Your Vehicle                  TUPPCETITIL 6  Lockout Protection  i dul ea dumaclacdurun 2 0                                  7 40   Delayed Locking   Pee                           2 4   LN                                    2  2 4   Ignition Transaxle Lock Check                    27 40   Key Lock Cylinder Service 2                     7 40     
70. 2 If a Tire Goes Flat   5 3 Other Warning Devices 5 22 Changing a Flat Tire   5 3 Jump Starting 5 35 Compact Spare Tire   5 8 Towing Your Vehicle 5 36 If Youre Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow  5 13 Engine Overheating       Press the button      to  make your front and  rear turn signal lamps  Hash on and off     Hazard Warning Flashers       Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what  position your key is in  and even if the key isn t in    To turn off the Hashers   pull out  on the collar        Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others  They  also let police know you have a problem  Your front and  rear turn signal lamps will Mush on and olf        When the hazard warning flashers are on  your           signals won t wark         1  b             Other Warning Devices    If you carry reflective triangles  you can set one up al  the side of the road about 300 feet   100 m  behind your  vehicle     Jump Starting    If your battery has run down  you may want to use  another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your  Buick  But please use the following steps to do it safely     Batteries can hurt you           can be dangerous  because        They contain acid that can burn vou      They contain gas that can explode or ignite   e They contain enough electricity to burn you     If vou don t follow these steps exactly  some or all  of these things can hurt you           NOTICE     Remember that ignoring these steps could result  in costly damage to vour vehicle t
71. 2 Kg  person who drinks three  2 ounce    355 ml  bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a  BAC of about 0 06 percent  The person would reach the  same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce  120 ml  glasses  of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces   45 ml  of a liquor like whiskey  gin or vodka        It   s the amount of alcohol that counts  For example  if  the same person drank three double martinis  3 ounces  or 90 ml of liquor each  within an hour  the person s         would      close to 0 12 percent  A person who  consumes food just before or during drinking will have a  somewhat lower BAC level     There is    gender difference  too  Women generally have  a lower relative percentage of body water than men   Since alcohal is carried in body water  this means that a    4 4    woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than     man of her same body weight when each has the same  number of drinks     The law in many U S  states sets the legal limit ata BAC  of 0 10 percent  Ina growing number of U S  states  and  throughout Canada  the limit is 0 08 percent  In some  other countries  it   s even lower  The BAC limit for all  commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent     The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six  drinks  in one hour   Of course  as we ve seen  it  depends on how much alcohol ts in the drinks  and how  quickly the person drinks them     But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of  0 10 percent  Research s
72. 210 of Industry and  Science Canada  Operation 15 subject to the following  two conditions   1  this device may not cause  interference  and  2  this device must accept any  interference received  including interference that may  cause undesired operation of the device     Changes or modifications to this system by other than an  authorized service facility could void authorization to  use this equipment    This system has a range of about 3 feet  1 m  up to   30 feet  9 m   At times you may notice a decrease in   range  This is normal for any remote keyless entry   system  If the transmitter does not work or if vou have  to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to   WOrk  try this    e Check to determine if hattery replacement is  necessary  See the instructions that follow        Check the distance  You may be too far from your  vehicle  You may need to stand closer during rainy  or snowy weather    e Check the location  Other vehicles or objects may be  blocking the signal  Take a few steps to the left or right   hold the transmitter higher  and try again        f you re still having trouble  see your Buick dealer  ar a qualified technician for service    Operation   The driver s door will unlock when UNLOCK      pressed    If UNLOCK ts pressed again within five seconds  all   doors will unlock  Pressing the UNLOCK button will   also illuminate the interior lamps  See  Hluminated   Entry  in the Index     2 10    All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed     The 
73. 25 seconds after you remove the key from  the ignition  This will give you time to find the door pull  handle or lock switches        Illuminated Entry  If Equipped     Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry  transmitter  if equipped  and the interior courtesy lamps  will turn on and stay      for up to    minute  The lamps  will turn off immediately by pressing the LOCK button  on the key transmitter  starting the engine or activating  the power door lacks     Perimeter Lighting  If Equipped     When the UNLOCK button on the key transmitter 15  pressed  the headlamps  parking lamps  back up lamps  and cornering lamps will turn on if it is dark enough  outside according to the twilight sentinel    If your vehicle is not equipped with twilight sentinel and  perimeter lighting is active  the lights will turn on whenever  the UNLOCK button on the transmitter is pressed     Personal Choice Programming    This feature can be programmed in the on or off mode  For each transmitter     To turn the feature off     1  Press and hold the door lock switch throughout this  procedure  All the doors will lack                      Press the instant alarm on the transmitter  Perimeter  lighting remains on at this time and the horn will  chirp two times    Press the instant alarm on the key transmitter again   Perimeter lighting is disabled and the horn will chirp  one time    Release the door lock switch  The perimeter lighting  feature is now off     turn the feature on     Pres
74. 904     David Buick was building gasoline engines hy 1899   and Marr  his engineer  apparently built the first auto to  be called a Buick in 1900  However  Buick traditionally  dates its beginnings to 1903  That was the year the  company was reorganized  refinanced and moved from  Detroit to Flint  Buick has always been a product  innovator  Buick engineers developed the    iv        valve in head  engine  a light  powerful and reliable  engine which would eventually influence the entire  automotive industry     William C  Durant was instrumental in promoting  Buicks across the country using his Durant Dort  Carriage Co  outlets and salespeople as the nucleus of a  giant distribution system  He knew the Buick as      self seller   If automobiles could be this good  he  thought  maybe it was time to switch from the horse and  buggy business to automobiles     At the 1905 New York  Auto Show  Durant took  orders for 1 000 Buicks  before the company had     built 40  On Buick s  success  Durant created a  holding company   September 16  1908  He  called it General Motors                William C   Billy  Durant       Durant also created    racing team that won 500 racing  trophies in 1909 and 1910  including successes al  Indianapolis two years before the Indy 500 began     The success of Buick engines was visible not only on  the race track  but in endurance tests across the country  and around the world  Buick was the only car to  complete a 1 000 mile Chicago to New York race
75. Automatic Transaxle            vrai         Re OR E AEN 2 51  Gross Axle Weight Rating                          4 3   Gross Vehicle Weight Rating                        4 3   Guide en                                                        ii  CSV AE               EE EE EE 4 31          Bulbs                CREATE EERIE            reticle 6 29  Hazard Warning Flashers                 M  Pise Resin 110202 Lu    Vx mavis Dan d dcn aru a 1 5  Headlamps                    2 41  PORTE  a               BORE EET           A 6 35  Bulb Replacement 2 20    aa acr rr rrr 6 29  High Low Beam Changer  E  2 36  CH RETIBOEE 22224            2 42  Wiring CE v Ee TEES TEE E IET 8 35  Hearing Impaired  Customer Assistance         e  8 4           correre aL E Exe d RUE AE 3 8  High   Beam Headlamps TRE etre        2 36  Highway Hypnosis   Re era 4 24  Hill und Mountain Roads              sees 4 24  Hitches  Trailer              4 36             Checking UC Ero oue e Face e ett ee 6 7  Release                                           6 5  Moi re           e ree TUA AS 2 33                   ek a    CREE DIC a 4 20        Positions i 2 19  lenition Transaxle Lock Check   7 42  Illuminated Entry   SACR Lut ca      ia tutta oe Tire 2 45  Inflation  I8                   nme Y are            e MEM  Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror 2                 2 47                                 7 43  PIE SSUES eI QVE T We ROP Te        AE 7 44  Calipen                               uaa     7 44  PIES AI     
76. B         IF your vehicle has an aluminum wheel with a center  cover that hides the wheel nuts  remove the center cover  by using the flat end of the wrench to pry it off        un  i                If your vehicle has a  wheel cover  remove it  bv using the flat end of  the wheel wrench        your vehicle has this  aluminum wheel  vou may  have plastic wheel nut caps   Use the wheel nut wrench  to remove the wheel nut  caps and to loosen the  wheel nuts        Pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off  When re installing the decorative nut caps  tighten the  Be careful  the rim edges may be sharp  Don t try to caps snugly with the wheel wrench  then continue  remove it with your bare hands  one quarter rotation to secure plastic caps     Note  When replacing any wheel cover  carefully line up        If your vehicle has wire  the tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel cover     wheel covers  remove  them as follows        5 26            Use the wire wheel key  wrench to remove the  wheel cover     Using the flat end of the  key wrench handle   between the wire wheel    cover and the center cap     pry off the center cap           Remove the  theft deterrent nut  by  plucing the key end of  the wire wheel key  wrench over the nut and  turning it to the left     Pull off the wire wheel cover    Note  When replacing the wheel cover  carefully line  up the tire valve stem and the notch in the wheel  cover           L   bur  m      Removing the Flat Tire and I
77. Break In       NOTICE     Your modern Buick doesn t need an elaborate     break in     But it will perform better in the long  run if vou follow these guidelines    e Don t drive at        one speed    fast or  slow    for the first 500 miles  805 km    Don t make full throttle starts    Avoid making hard stops for the first   200 miles  322 km  ur so  During this time  your new brake linings aren t yet broken  in  Hard stops with new linings can mean  premature wear and earlier replacement   Follow this breaking in guideline every  time you get new brake linings    Don t tow a trailer during break in  See     Towing a Trailer  in the Index for   more information           Ignition Positions    With the ignition key in the ignition switch  vou can turn  the switch to five different positions        ACCESSORY       The accessory position lets you use  things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the  engine is off  To use  push in the key and turn it toward  you  Your steering wheel will remain locked  just as it    was belore vou inserted the key     2 19    LOCK  B   This is the only position in which you         remove the key  This position locks your ignition  steering  wheel and transaxle  It s a theft deterrent feature     OFF  C   This position lets you turn off the engine but  still turn the steering wheel  It doesn t lock the steering  wheel like LOCK and it doesn t send any electrical  power t   the accessories  Use OFF if you must have  your vehicle in moti
78. CE             IE 2 63  4 7 Check Engine LIgat ior                   2 66  dite BA Met Hea      Due          Ae a ape DA a 6 25 Check Oil Level Light PIRA UN RU                 uP pel 2 69  Master Cylinder rez II E EA             c  8 25 Checking Your Restraint Systems                    1 46  uiia ERR        Chemical Point Spotting      6    5 ecce 6 52  Pedal VEL paw bade dane oe cd rx eon EE aa 6 28 Child Restraint                         1 35  Replacing System Parts                          6 28 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position             1 37  System Warning Light       Mr er SEES S E Sn Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position    iiL  1 39  ERRAT IOTER TENIS      TET 4 37 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position            1 4   Transaxle Shift Interlock                           2 24  7 41 Top Strap AT                                                  aid lee 1 36  WERL reat                          I  6 27 Wie Pul                       EE           1 35  Brakes  Anti Lock              WOES het ben  tere E Rips 4 7 Cigarette Lighter                bea            narii ET E                                            ut 4 6 Circuit Breakers and Fuses  22                2     6 56  Braking in Emergencies                 nee prae            PU                                    P YER TT RRA 6 14                                               iene be pect ela a EA 2 19 Cleaning  Broche              ausa et                                                 Aluminum Wh
79. FULL                 2 71       NOTES    2 72      8  Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems       In this section  you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your Buick  Be sure    to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle     3 1 Comfort Controls 3 22  4 6 Air Conditioning     3 7 Heating 31 25  3 8 Ventilation Systern and Tips   3 9 Tips for Defogging and Defrosting 4 30  3 10 Kear Window Defogger 3 33  3 11 Passenger Control 3 34  3 11 Steering Wheel Controls for Climate Control 3 34  3 12 Audio Systems 3 34  3 12 Setting the Clock 3 35  3 12 AM FM Stereo 3 35  3 14 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3 36  3 18 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player    and Tone Control       AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player  and Tone Control   AM FM Stereo with Cassette  CD Players  and Tone Control   Theft Deterrent Feature   Steering Wheel Controls   Understanding Radio Reception   Tips About Your Audio System   Adding Sound Equipment to Your Vehicle  Care of Your Cassette Tape Player   Care of Your Compact Dises   Heated Backlite Antenna    Comfort Controls    This section describes how to operate your climate  control system  Your climate control system uses  ozone friendly    134   refrigerant    With these systems  you car control the heating   cooling and ventilation in your Buick  Your vehicle  also has a flow through ventilation system described  later in this section     Electronic Touch Climate Control 
80. Highway  Traffic Safety Administration  which grades tires by  wreadweur  traction and temperature performance   This  applies only to vehicles sold in the United States   The  grades are molded on the sidewalls af most passenger  car tires  The Uniform Tire Quality Grading svstem does  not apply to deep tread  winter type snow tires   space saver or temporary use spare tires  tires with  nominal rim diameters of I0 to 12 inches  25 to 30         or to some limited production tires     While the tires available on General Motors passenger  cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these  erades  they must also conform to Federal safety  requirements and additional General Motors Tire  Performance Criteria  TPC  standards        Treadwear    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  conditions on a specified government test course  For  example  a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half    1 1 2  times as well on the government course as a tire  graded 100  The relative performance of tires depends  upon the actual conditions of their use  however  and  may depart significantly trom the norm due to variations  in driving habits  service practices and differences in  road characteristics and climate        Traction    A  B  C    The traction grades  from highest to lowest  are          and C  and they represent the tire   s ability to stop on wet  pavement as measured under controlled conditions on  spec
81. ICE     We recommend vou use only fluid labeled    DEXRON    IIL  because fluid with that label is  made especially for your automatic transaxle   Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III  is not covered by your new vehicle warranty           3  After adding fluid  recheck the fluid level as  described under    How to Check     4  When the correct fluid level is obtained  push the  dipstick back in all the way    Engine Coolant   The cooling system in vour vehicle is filled with   DEX COOL   engine coolant  This coolant is designed   to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 50 000 miles    240 000 km   whichever occurs first  if you add only   DEX COOL extended life coolant    The following explains your cooling system and how to   add coolant when it is low  If you have a problem with   engine overheating  see    Engine Overheating    in   the Index       50 50 mixture of water and DEX COOL      coolant wall       Give freezing protection down to  34  F   37  C     Give boiling protection up to 265     129  C     Protect against rust and corrosion     Help keep the proper engine temperature     Let the Warning lights and gages work as they should     6 19    NOTICE     When adding coolant  it is important that you use  only DEX COOL   silicate free  coolant    If coolant other than DEX COOL  is added to  the system  premature engine  heater core or  radiator corrosion may result  In addition  the  engine coolant will require change sooner    at  30 000 miles  50 000 km  
82. IZE SPEED PRESSURE  RTG PSI KPa  FRT  RR   SPA     IF TIRES ARE HOT  ADD 4PSI  28KPs  SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL     INFORMATION    Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it  may properly carry  The Tire Loading Information label  found on the rear edge of the driver s door tells you the  proper size  speed rating and recommended inflation  pressures for the tires on your vehicle  It also gives you  important information about the number of people that  can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can  carry  This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight  and includes the weight of all occupants  cargo and all  nonfactory installed options               MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP    DATE GVWR GAWRFRT          RR    THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI  CABLE U S  FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE  SAFETY  BLIMPER  AND THEFT PREVENTION  STANDARDS     EFFECT ON THE DATE OF  MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE     The other label is the Certification label  found on the  rear edge of the driver s door  It tells you the gross  weicht capacity of your vehicle  called the GVWR   Gross Vehicle Weight Rating   The GVWR includes the  weight of the vehicle  all occupants  fuel and cargo   Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle  or the Gross  Axle Weight Rating  GAWR  for either the front or  rear axle    And  if you do have a heavy load  you should spread it        Don t carry more than 176 165   80 kilograms  in  vour trunk     Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the  GVWR  or
83. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio  functions whenever battery power is removed     If THEFTLOCK is active  the THEFTLOCK indicator  will flash when the ignition is off     The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or  ignored  If ignored  the system plays normally and the  radio is not protected by the feature  IF THEFTLOCK is  activated  your radio will not operate if stolen     When THEFTLOCK is activated  the radio will display  LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery  power is removed  If your battery loses power for any  reason  vou must unlock the radio with the secret cade  before it will operate     Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature    The instructions which follow  explain how to enter  your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system   It is recommended that you read through all nine steps  before starting the procedure    NOTE  If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse  between any steps  the radio automatically reverts to  time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4        1 2    un    Write down any three or four digit number from             1999 and keep it in    safe place separate  from the vehicle     Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN   Turn the radio off     Press the   and 4 buttons together  Hold them down  until     shows on the display  Next you will use the  secret code number which you have written down     Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display     Press MIN again to make the last two dig
84. N m      NOTICE           Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to  brake pulsation and rotor damage  To avoid  expensive brake repairs  evenly tighten the wheel    nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper  torque specification     Don t try to put    wheel cover on your compact spare  tire  It won t fit  Store the wheel cover in the trunk  until vou have the flat tire repaired or replaced     NOTICE     Wheel covers won t fit on your compact spare  If  vou try to put a wheel cover on vour compact  spare  you could damage the cover or the spare        Storing the Flat Tire and Tools Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible   Store the jack and wheel wrench in their box in the trunk  on the passenger s side     Storing a jack  a tire or other equipment in the    passenger compartment of the vehicle could  cause injury  In a sudden stop or collision  loose  equipment could strike someone  Store all these  in the proper place        After you ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle   you ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk  Use the  following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk        et    Storing the Spare Tire and Tools    Storing a jack  a tire or other equipment in the    passenger compartment of the vehicle could  cause injury  In a sudden stop or collision  loose  equipment could strike someone  Store all these  in the proper place        The compact spare is for temporary use only  Replace  the compact spare tire with 
85. OON light to  be lit for a bulb check period of three seconds        The reset button is in the glove box  With the ignition  key in the RUN position  push the reset button  hold it in  for at least five seconds but net more than 60 seconds   After five seconds  the CHANGE OIL SOON light will  flash four times and then go off  This indicates that the  Oil Life Monitor System has been reset     Fuel Gage       ttakes a little more or less fuel t   fill up than the  gage indicated  For example  the gage may have  inchicated the tank was half full  but it actually took a  little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill  the tank     e The gage moves a little when you turn a corner   speed up  or make a hard stop     hes         1 e The gave doesn t go back to EMPTY  E  when you  turn off the ignition     Low Fuel Light  If Equipped        If your Buick has the gage   cluster  a light near the fuel  gage will turn on when you  are low on fuel  You should    Standard Cluster Gage Cluster       Your fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in your      tank  It works only when the engine is on  When the               ehm ierit ene TU        set more Hel as sonas  indicator nears EMPTY  Ei  you still have a little fuel NN  you can    left  You need to gel more fuel right away  NUM  H 4    Here        some things that some owners ask about  None w N    of these show a problem with your fuel gage                   service station  the gas pump shuts off before  the gage reads 
86. OW  The display will show fan speed  comfort  level setting and airflow direction for a few seconds  whenever AUTO is selected  and then it will display the  outside temperature  The outside temperature reading is  most accurate when the vehicle is moving  During stops   the display shows the previous temperature for best  accuracy and system control        If the display is flashing after the climate control system  is started  there is a problem with the system and you  should see your dealer for service     Sun and temperature sensors automatically adjust the  uir temperature  the airflow direction and the fan speed  to maintain your comfort setting  The system may  supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle toward   the sun  Be careful not to put anything over the sensors       top of the dash                  Temperature Button    To adjust the comfort level you want maintained inside  the vehicle  push the TEMP button  If you want     warmer comfort level  push the red arrow  If you want  a cooler comfort level  push the blue arrow  Your  comfort setting is shown in the display     Fan Button    The speed of the blower fan is controlled automatically  if you have the system set for AUTO  Pressing the  FAN button will display and hold the current blower  fan setting     If you want the blower fan to run at a lower speed  push  the hottom of the FAN button  The fan speed will  decrease with every push of the button until the lowest  speed is reached  If you want to incr
87. RK       only when your  vehicle is stopped     NOTICE     Holding vour key in START for longer than       2       doesn t start right away  hold your key in    START for about three to five seconds at a time until  your engine starts  Wait about 13 seconds between  each try to help avoid draining your battery             3  If vour engine still won t start  or starts but then  stops   it could be flooded with too much gasoline     1  Without pushing the accelerator pedal  turn your Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the  ignition key to START  When the engine starts  let floor and holding it there as you hold the             eo of the key  The idle speed will go down as your START for about three seconds  If the vehicle starts  engine gets warm  briefly but then stops again  do the same thing  but    this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds   This clears the extra gasoline from the engine    After waiting about 15 seconds  repeat the normal  starting procedure         2 21                  Engine Coolant Heater  Option     Your engine is designed to work with the  electronics in your vehicle  If you add electrical  parts or accessories  vou could change the way  the engine operates  Before adding electrical     equipment  check with your dealer  If you don t   your engine might not perform properly   If you ever have to have your vehicle towed  see  the part of this manual that tells how to do it  without damaging your vehicle  See    Towing  Your
88. SORY or RUN    2  Turn the radio off    3  Press the   and 4 buttons together  Hold them down  until SEC shows on the display    4  Press MIN and O00 will appear on the display    5  Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree  with your code    6  Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree  with your code    7  Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the  code matches the secret code you have written down   The display will show      indicating that the radio is  no longer secured    If the code entered is incorrect  SEC will appear on the   display  The radio will remam secured until the correct   code is entered    When battery power is removed and later applied to a   secured radio  the radio won t turn on and LOC will   appear on the display    To unlock    secured radio see  Unlocking the   Theft Deterrent Feature After    Power Loss  earlier in   this section        Steering Wheel Controls  If Equipped     If your vehicle has this feature  you can control certain    radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel     Some steering wheel controls may operate climate  controls  See  Steering Wheel Controls for Climate  Control  earlier in this section     SEEK  Press this button  to go to the next higher or  lower radio station  Press  and hold this button again  for two seconds and SCAN  will appear  Press it again       stop scanning        SCAN  Press this button to scan the stationis preset on  your radio pushbuttons  This feature works like
89. TUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 27    Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule       The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles   166 000 km  should be performed after 100 000 miles   166 000 km  at the same intervals  The services shown  at 150 000 miles  240 000 km  should be performed at  the same interval after 150 000 miles  240 000 km     See    Owner Checks and Services    and    Periodic  Maintenance Inspections    following     Footnotes     The U S  Environmental Protection Agency or the  California Air Resources Board has determined that the  failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the  emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the  completion of the vehicle s useful life  We  however  urge  that all recommended maintenance services be performed at  the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded      Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage   transaxle shift linkage  parking brake cable guides and  underbody contact points      If your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor  the  monitor will show you when to change the oil    usually  between 3 000 miles  5 000 km  and 7 500 miles    7 28       I     12 500 km  since your last oil change  Under   severe conditions  the indicator may come on before  3 000 miles  5 000 km   Never drive your vehicle more  than 7 500 miles  12 500 km  or 12 months without an  oil change     The system won t detect dust in the oil  So if you drive  in a dusty area  be sure to cha
90. V 6 engine was  used in the Special        1962 Buick Special    Built inside the walls of the old buildings in Buick s  former Flint complex  which formed the cornerstone of  General Motors  Buick City is a state of the art  assembly facility with more than 200 robots and other  high tech equipment  It was completed in the fall   of 1985    Buicks are  and will continue to be  premium American  matorcars with smooth power  high performance  rich  detail and comtortable accommodation        Ed Mertz  General Manager  Buick Motor Division    Our mission is simple      Buick will provide Premium American Motorcars  backed with services that exceed our customers     expectations  throughout the purchase  ownership   service and repurchase experience      Buicks are SUBSTANTIAL   Buicks are DISTINCTIVE   Buicks are POWERFUL   Buicks are PREMIUM       How to Use this Manual    Many people read their owner s manual from beginning  to end when they first receive their new vehicle         you do this  it will help you learn about the features  and controls for your vehicle  In this manual  you ll  find that pictures and words work together to explain  things quickly     Index    A good place to look for what you need 1s the Index in  the back of the manual  It s an alphabetical list of all  that s in the manual  and the page number where you ll  find it     Safety Warnings and Symbols   You will find a number of safety cautions in this book   We use    box and the word CAUTION to tel
91. a  Barbados  Antigua and the British  Virgin Islands  1 800 534 0122    In all other Caribbean countries   809  763 1315    In other overseas locations  call GM International  Product Center in Canada at   905  644 4112     8 3    For prompt assistance  please have the following   information available to give the Customer   Assistance Representative       Your name  address  home and business  telephone numbers      Vehicle Identification Number  This 15 available  trom the vehicle registration or title  or the plate at  the top left of the instrument panel and visible  through the windshield     e Dealership name and location   e Vehicle delivery        and present mileage    e Nature of concem    We encourage you Lo call us so we can give your inquiry    prompt attention  However  if you wish to write  Buick  address your inquiry to     Buick Motor Division  Customer Relations Center  902 E  Hamilton Avenue  Flint  MI 48550     In Canada  write to     General Motors of Canada Limited  Customer Communication Centre  163 005   908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario LIH          8 4    Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance  Information booklet far addresses of GM  Overseas offices     When contacting Buick  please remember that your  concern will likely be resolved in the dealership  using  the dealer s facilities  equipment and personnel  That  is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you  have    concern     Customer Assistance for Text  Telephone  TTY  Users  
92. a full size tire as soon as you  can  See  Compact Spare Tire  later in this section  See 1  Jack  the storing instructions label to replace your compact    Wheel Wrench  spare into your trunk properly  i   Wing Bolt    Tire  Cover  Boli                   Dom p       5 34      Compact Spare Tire    Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated  when your vehicle was new  it can lose air after a  time  Check the inflation pressure regularly  It should    be 60 psi  420 kPa      After installing the compact spare on your vehicle   you should stop as soon as possible and make sure  your spare tire 1s correctly inflated  The compact  spare 15 made to perform well at speeds up ta 65 mph     105 km h  for distances up to 3 000 miles  5 000 km      so you        finish your trip and have your full size tire  repaired or replaced where you want  Of course  it s  best to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon  as you can  Your spare will last longer and be in good  shape in case vou need it again        NOTICE     When the compact spare is installed  don t take  vour vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash  with guide rails         compact spare can get  caught on the rails  That can damage the tire and  wheel  and maybe other parts of your vehicle        Don t use your compact spare on other vehicles     And don   t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with  other wheels or tires  They won t fit  Keep your spare  tire and its wheel together     Tire chains won t fit 
93. a lot  of things invisible     You can be temporarily blinded by approaching  headlamps  It can take a second or two  or even several  seconds  for your eyes to readjust to the dark  When you  are faced with severe glare  as from a driver who  doesn t lower the high beams  or a vehicle with  misaimed headlamps   slow down    little  Avoid staring  directly into the approaching headlamps        Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle  clean    inside and out             at night is made much  worse by dirt on the glass  Even the inside of the glass    can build up a film caused by dust  Dirty glass makes    lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would   making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly     Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a  roadway when you are in    turn or curve  Keep your  eyes moving  that way  it   s easier to pick out dimly  lighted objects  Just as your headlamps should be  checked regularly for proper aim  so should your eyes  he examined regularly  Some drivers suffer from night  blindness    the inability to see in dim light     and aren t  even aware of it     4 17    Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble  On a wet  E road  you can t stop  accelerate or turn as well because  vour tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads   And  if your tires don t have much tread left  you ll get  even less traction  It s always wise to go slower and be  cautious if rain starts
94. again to stop  scanning  The sound will mute while scanning     PUSHBUTTONS  The six numbered pushbuttons let  you return to your favorite stations  You can set up to  18 stations  six AM  six        and six     2   Just     1  Turn the radio on     2  Press AM FM to select the band   3  Tune in the desired station   4  Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons  The    sound will mute  When it returns  release the button   Whenever you press that numbered button  the  station vou set will return     5  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     P SCAN  Press this button to listen to each of your  preset stations for    few seconds  The radio will go to  the first preset station  stop for a few seconds  then go  on to the next preset station  Press P SCAN again to  stop scanning  The radio will not stop at a preset if the  station is weak          3 15    Setting the Tone    BASS  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease bass     TREB  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease treble  If a station is weak  or noisy  you may want to decrease the treble     Push these knobs back into their stored pusitiums when  you re not using them     Adjusting the Speakers    BAL  Turn the control behind the upper knob to move  the sound to the left or right speakers  The middle  position balances the sound between the speakers     FADE  Turn the control behind the lower knob to move  the sound to the front or rear s
95. all of the trunk    Put small loads  like grocery bags  behind the net  It can  help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or  quick starts and stops  For heavier loads  store them in  the trunk as far forward as you can    You can unhook the net so that it will lie      when  you re not using it     2 52    Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter    The tront center and rear ashtrays may be removed for  cleaning  Hold the sides of the ashiray and then pull the  ashtray up and out          NOTICE     Don t put papers or other flammable objects into  vour ashtrays  Hot cigarettes or other smoking  materials could ignite them  causing a damaging fire        To use a lighter  push the center all the way in and let it  zo  When it is ready  the center will pop back by itself   Pull out the entire unit to use it     NOTICE     Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with vour hand    while it is heating  If vou do  it won t be able to  back away from the heating element when it s  ready  That can make it overheat  damaging the  lighter and the heating element           Sun Visors Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors   If Equipped     Dual Sun Visors       When you open the cover to either the passenger s or  Each sun visor has two parts  so that both the windshield driver s visor vanity mirror  the lamps will turn on  The  and door glass        be shaded at the same time  There 18 brightness of the lamp can be adjusted by sliding the  also a tinted transparent extension that may be pulled s
96. an burn could touch hot exhaust    parts under your vehicle and ignite  Don t park  over papers  leaves  dry grass or other things that    can burn     Engine Exhaust    Engine exhaust can kill  It contains the gas  carbon monoxide         which vou can t see or  smell  It can cause unconsciousness and death     You might have exhaust coming in if     Your exhaust system sounds strange  or different   Your vehicle gets rusty underneath   Your vehicle was damaged in a collision   Your vehicle was damaged when driving over  high points on the road or over road debris   Repairs weren t done correctly   Your vehicle or exhaust system had been  modified improperly   If vou ever suspect exhaust is coming into  your vehicle   e Drive it only with all the windows down to  blow out any CO             Have vour vehicle fixed immediately        Running Your Engine While  You re Parked    It s better not to park with the engine running  But if you  ever have to  here are some things to know     Idling the engine with the climate control system  off could allow dangerous exhaust into   vour vehicle  see the earlier Caution under   Engine Exhaust      Also  idling in a closed in place        let deadly    carbon monoxide  CO  into your vehicle even if  the fan switch is at the highest setting  One place  this can happen is a garage  Exhaust    with   CO    can come in easily  NEVER park ina  garage with the engine running    Another closed in place can be a blizzard     See  Blizzard  in t
97. and SCAN will appear on the display  Use SCAN to  listen to stations for a few seconds  The radio will go to     station  stop          few seconds  then go on to the next  station  Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop  scanning  The sound will mute while scanning        PUSHBUTTONS  The six numbered pushbuttons let  you return to your favorite stations  You can set up to  18 stations  six AM  six        and six FM2   Just        Turn the radio on   2  Press the AM FM button to select the band   3  Tune in the desired station     4  Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons  The  sound will mute  When it returns  release the button   Whenever you press that numbered butron  the  station you set will return     5  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     P SCAN  Press this bution to listen to cach of your  preset stations for    few seconds  The radio will go to  the first preset station  stop for a few seconds  then go  on 1o the next preset station  Press P SCAN again to stop  scanning  The radio will not stop at a preset station if the  station 18 Weak     Setting the Tone   BASS  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease bass              Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease treble  If a station is weak  or noisy  vou may want to decrease the treble    Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  you      not using them     Adjusting the Speakers    BAL  Turn the control behi
98. and glance over your shoulder as often as  necessary  Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow     Once you   re on the freeway  adjust your speed to the  posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it   s slower  Stay  in the right lane unless you want to pass    Before changing lanes  check your mirrors  Then use  your turn signal    Just hefore vou leave the lane  glance quickly over your  shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in vour     blind    spot        Once vou are moving on the freeway  make certain you  allow a reasonable following distance  Expect to move  slightly slower at night     When you want to leave the                  move to the proper  lane well in advance  If you miss your exit  do not   under any circumstances  stop and back up  Drive on to  the next exit     The exit ramp        be curved  sometimes quite sharply   The exit speed is usually posted     Reduce your speed according to your speedometer  nat  to your sense of motion  After driving for any distance  at higher speeds  you may tend to think you are going  slower than you actually are     Before Leaving on a Long Trip    Make sure you re ready  Try to be well rested  If you  must start when you re not fresh    such as after a day s  work    don t plan to make too many miles that first part  of the journey  Wear comfortuble clothing and shoes you  can easily drive in     Is your vehicle ready for a long trip  If you keep it  serviced and maintained  its ready to go       needs  
99. and in varying weather conditions  We ve also  included many other useful tips on driving     4 2 Defensive Driving 4 18 Driving      Rain and on Wet Roads  4 3 Drunken Driving 4 2  City Driving   4 5 Control of a Vehicle 4 22 Freeway Driving   4 6 Braking 4 23 Betore Leaving on a Long Trip  4 10 Steering 4 24 Highway Hypnosis   4 13 Off Road Recovery 4 24 Hill and Mountain Roads   4 13 Passing 4 26 Winter Driving   4 15 Loss of Control 4 3  Loading Your Vehicle   4 16 Driving at Night 4 33 Towing a Trailer       4 2    Defensive Driving   The best advice anvone can give about driving is   Drive defensively    Please start with a very important safety device in your  Buick  Buckle up   See  Safety Belts  in the Index      Delensive driving really means         ready for anything    On city streets  rural roads or freeways  it means   always expect the unexpected      Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be  careless and make mistakes  Anticipate what they might  do  Be ready for their mistakes     Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of  accidents  Yet they are common  Allow enough  following distance  It s the best defensive driving  maneuver  in both city and rural driving  You never  know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake  or turn suddenly     Drunken Driving    Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  a national tragedy  It s the number one contributor to the  highway death toll  claiming thousands of victim
100. are that it can happen     Then here are some tips        Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated  with a  comfortably cool interior        Keep your eves moving  Scan the road ahead and to  the sides  Check your rearview mirrors and your  instruments frequently       If you get sleepy  pull off the road into a rest  service  or parking area and take a nap  get some exercise  or  both  For safety  treat drowsiness on the highway as  an emergency     4 24       Hill and Mountain Roads       Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from  driving in flat or rolling terrain           If you drive regularly in steep country  or if you re  planning to visit there  here are some tips that can make  your trips safer and more enjoyable        Keep your vehicle      good shape  Check all fluid Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL iX  or with the  ignition off is dangerous  Your brakes will have to  do all the work of slowing down  They could get  so hot that they wouldn t work well  You would        Know how to go down hills  The most important then have poor braking or even none going down  thing to know is this  let your engine do some of the    slowing down  Shift to    lower gear when you go  down a steep or long hill     levels and also the brakes  tires  cooling svstem  and transaxle  These parts can work hard on  mountain roads     a hill  You could crash  Always have your engine  running and your vehicle in gear when vou  go downhill           Know how to go uphill Drive in t
101. arly reaches 90  F  32  C  or higher    e Inhilly or mountainous terrain       When doing frequent trailer towing        Uses such as found in taxi  police or delivery service     If you do not use your vehicle under any of these  conditions  the fluid and filter do not require changing     See  Scheduled Maintenance Services  in the Index     How to Check   Because this operation can be a little difficult  vou may  choose to have this done at your Buick dealership  Service Department    If you do it yourself  be sure ro follow all the  instructions here  or you could get a false reading on  the dipstick     NOTICE       Too much or too little fluid can damage vour  transaxle  Too much can mean that some of the     fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts  or exhaust system parts  starting a fire  Be sure to  get an accurate reading if vou check your  transaxle fluid         Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle  fluid level if you have been driving        When outside temperatures are above 90      32  C         Athigh speed for quite a while           Inheavy traffic    especially in hot weather       While pulling a trailer    To get the right reading  the fuid should be at normal  operating temperature  which is 180 F to 200  F  82  C  ta 93  C     Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles   24 km  when outside temperatures are above 50  F   10  C   If its colder than 50  F  10  C   you may have  to drive longer     Checking the Fluid L
102. ases and away from direct  sunlight and dust  If the surface of a disc is soiled   dampen a clean  soft cloth in a mild  neutral detergent  solution and clean it  wiping from the center to the edge     Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling  dises  Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the  edge of the hole and the outer edge     3 35    Heated Backlite Antenna    Your AM FM antenna is integrated with vour rear  window defogger  into your rear window  Be sure  that the inside surface of the rear window is not  scratched and that the lines on the glass are not  damaged  If the inside surface is damaged  it could  interfere with radio reception     Do not try to clear frost or other material from the  inside of the rear window with an ice scraper  credit  card or other hard object  This may damage the rear  defogger grid and affect vour radio s ability to pick  up stations clearly     pM             M P ma           s                                If  when you turn on your rear window defogger   vou hear static on your radio station  il means     defogger grid line has been damaged and must be  repaired   Your radio is not at fault      If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your  Buick  and the antenna needs to be attached to the  glass  he sure that you do not damage the grid lines  for the AM FM antenna       NOTES    3 38       88  Section 4 Your Driving and the Road       Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads 
103. at   800 955 5100 or the Buick Customer  Assistance Center at 1 800 955 7200     Warranty Information    Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet  that contains detailed warranty information     8 8    REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  TO THE UNITED STATES  GOVERNMENT   If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could  cause a crash or could cause injury or death  you should  immediately inform the National Highway Traltic  Safety Administration  NHTSA   in addition to  notifying General Motors     If NHTSA receives similar complaints  it may open an  investigation  and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  u group of vehicles  it may order a recall and remedy  campaign  However  NHTSA cannot become involved  in individual problems between you  your dealer or  General Motors   To contact NHTSA  you may either call the Auto Safety  Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393  or 366 0123 in the  Washington  D C  area  or write to   NHTSA  U S  Department of Transportation  Washington  D C  20590    You can also obtain other information about motor  vehicle safety from the Hotline        REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  TO THE CANADIAN  GOVERNMENT    If you live in Canada  and you believe that your vehicle  has a safety defect  vou should immediately notify  Transport Canada  in addition to notifying General  Motors of Canada Limited  You may write to    Transport Canada   Box S880   Ottawa  Ontario        3 2    REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  TO GENERAL MOTORS  In addition to no
104. ation 8 9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors   8 7 GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute 8 9 Ordering Service and Owner Publications  Resolution Program   in Canada          Customer Satisfaction Procedure       8 2    Buick dealers have the facilities  trained technicians and  up to date information to promptly address any  concerns you may have  However  if a concern has not  been resolved to your complete satisfaction  take the  following steps    STEP ONE    Discuss your concern with a member  of dealership management  Normally  concerns        be  quickly resolved at that level  If the matter has already  been reviewed with the Sales  Service or Parts  Manager  contact the owner of the dealership or the  General Manager        STEP TWO    If after contactine a member of  dealership management  it appears your concem cannet  be resolved by the dealership without further help   contact the Buick Customer Relations Center by calling  1 800 521 7304  In Canada  contact GM of Canada  Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling    1 800 222 2777  English  or 1 800 263 7854  French      For help outside of the United States and Canada  call  the following numbers as appropriate     e In Mexico   525  625 3256        In Puerto Rico  1 800 496 9992  English  or  1 800 496 9993  Spanish     In the U S  Virgin Islands  1 800 496 9904    In the Dominican Republie  1 800 751 4135   English  or 1 800 751 4136  Spanish     In the Bahamas  1 800 389 0009    In Bermud
105. ative     terminals on  each battery     6  Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or  missing insulation  If they do  you could get a shock     Using a match near    battery can cause batterv  The vehicles could be damaged  too     gas to explode  People have been hurt doing this          some have been blinded  Use a flashlight if Before you connect the cables  here are some basic  vou need more light  things vou should know  Positive     will go to  positive     and negative     will eo to negative      or a metal engine part  Don t connect positive     Lo  negative     or you ll get a short that would damage  the battery and maybe other parts  too     Be sure the battery has enough water  You don t  need to add water to the Delco Freedom   battery    installed in every new GM vehicle  But if a  battery has filler caps  be sure the right amount  of fluid is there  If it is low  add water to take care    of that first  If you don t  explosive gas could be  present   Battery fluid contains acid that can burn vou   Don t get it on vou  If you accidentally get it in  your eves or on your skin  flush the place with  water and get medical help immediately     Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you  badly  Keep your hands away from moving parts  once the engines are running              Un       amp   Don t let the other end    touch metal  Connect  it to the positive      terminal of the good  battery  Use a remote  positive     terminal if  the vehicle has     
106. ator pedal when the transaxle is in gear  If  that doesn t get you out after a few tries  vou may need  to be towed       If you do need to be towed out  see   Towing Your Vehicle  in the Index              NOTES          NOTES       O Section 6 Service and Appearance Care       Here you will find information about the care of your Buick  This section begins with service and fuel information   and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels  There ts also technical information about your    vehicle  and a part devoted to its appearance care     6 2  6 3  6 4  6 5  6 7  6 10  6 14  6 16  6 19  6 22  6 23  6 24    Service   Fuel   Fuels in Foreign Countries  Filling Your Tank   Checking Things Under the Hood  Engine Oil   Air Cleaner   Automatic Transaxle Fluid  Engine Coolant   Radiator Pressure Cap   Power Steering Fluid   Windshield Washer Fluid   Brakes   Battery   Bulb Replacement   Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement  Tires   Appearance Care    6 47  6 49  6 49  6 50  6 51  6 52  6 52  6 52  6 53  6 54  6 54  6 55  6 61  6 61  6 62  6 62  6 62  6 62    Cleaning the Inside of Your Buick  Care of Safety Belts   Cleaning Glass Surfaces   Cleaning the Outside of Your Buick  Cleaning Aluminum Wheels  Cleaning Tires   Sheet Metal Damage   Finish Damage   Appearance Care Materials Chart  Vehicle Identification Number  VIN   Service Parts Identification Label  Electrical System   Replacement Bulbs   Capacities and Specifications        Conditioning Refrigerants
107. ave a cassette tape in the player while  listening to the radio  it may become warm     CLN  If this message appears on the display  the  cassette tape player needs to be cleaned  It will still play  tapes  but you should clean it as soon as possible to  prevent damage to the tapes and player  See  Care of  Your Cassette Tape Player  in the Index  After you clean  the player  press and hold EJECT for five seconds to  reset the CLN indicator  The radio will display     to  show the indicator was reset               Stereo with Cassette Tape Plaver  and Automatic Tone Control       Plaving the Radio   VOLUME  Press this knob to turn the system on and  off  To increase volume  turn the knob clockwise  Turn  it counterclockwise to decrease the volume     RECALL  Press this button briefly to recall the station  being played or to display the clock  To change what is  normally shown on the display  station or time   press  this button until you see the display you want  then hold  the button until the display flashes  If you press the    button when the ienition is off  the clock will show for        ew seconds     Finding a Station               Press this button to switch between AM          and FM2  The display shows your selection     TUNE  Press the up or down arrow to choose  radio stations     SEEK  Press the up or down arrow to go to the next  higher or lower station and stay there  The sound will  mute while seeking     SCAN  Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds  a
108. bubble     6 35    If you find that the headlamp aiming needs adjustment   follow these steps     1  Start by opening the  hood and locating the  vertical aim level that  vou can see through the  top of the headlamp  lens  Locate the bubble  inside the level for  vertical headlamp aim        It is recommended that the upper limit not exceed plus  0 4 degrees from the center of the bubble  Other drivers  may flash their high beams at you if your adjustment is  much above plus 0 4 degrees     2  Locate the headlamp    aiming screw that is  under the hood   directly behind the  headlamp assembly        3  Turn the vertical aiming screw until the bubble  inside the level is centered at zero  0         After the vertical aim is correct  check the horizontal  aim for each headlamp and adjust as necessary  Turn  the horizontal aiming screw until the end of the  screw aligns with the zero          Re check the vertical aim to make sure it remains  correct after the horizontal aim adjustment   Adjust as necessary        6 37       Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement       Replacement blades come in different types and         removed in different ways  Here s how to remove the  type with a release clip     1  Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield     2  Push down on the release clip with a screwdriver and  pull the blade assembly off the wiper arm     3  Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm     For the correct windshield wiper blade replacement  length an
109. cations for the  1997 GM transmissions  transaxles and transfer cases   RETAIL SELL PRICE   40 00    SERVICE BULLETINS   Service Bulletins aive technical service information needed  to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks   Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the  diagnosis and service of your vehicle     PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON  THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO     Helm  Incorporated                 07130   Detroit  MI 48207    OWNER S INFORMATION   Owner publications are written directly for Owners and  intended to provide basic operational information about the  vehicle  The owner s manual will include the Maintenance  schedule for all models     In Portfolio  Includes a Portfolio  Owner s Manual and  Warranty Booklet    RETAIL SELL PRICE   15 00   Without Portfolio  Owner s Manual only    RETAIL SELL PRICE   10 00    CURRENT  amp  PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS    service Publications are available for current and past  model GM vehicles       request an order form  please  specity year and model name of the vehicle     OR ORDER TOLL FREE  1 800 782 4356  Monday Friday 8 00 AM     6 00 PM Eastern Time  For Credit Card Orders Only  VISA MasterCard Discover                    ORDEH TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt  Please allow              time for postal   NOTE  Far Credit Card Holgers Only  service  If further information is needed  write to the address shown below or call  1 800 782 4356 1 800 782 4356  Materia
110. ce any cables that have high effort or  excessive wear  Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise  control cables     Brake System Inspection    Inspect the complete system  Inspect brake lines and  hoses for proper hook up  binding  leaks  cracks   chafing  etc  Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors  for surface condition  Also inspect drum brake linings  for wear and cracks  Inspect other brake parts  including  drums  wheel cylinders  calipers  parking brake  etc   Check parking brake adjustment  You may need to have  your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits  or conditions result in frequent braking     Caliper Knuckle Maintenance Inspection    If you operate your vehicle in    highly corrosive  environment  as indicated by the shaded areas on the  map following this text  your vehicle may require  additional brake service  Refer to the appropriate GM  Service Bulletin for the proper caliper inspection  procedure  As necessary  caliper pins and knuckle brake  pad abutments should be lubricated at every other tire  rotation  Also  see your GM dealer s service department  or qualified service center for additional information     7 44          Part D  Recommended Fluids         USAGE   FLUID LUBRICANT  Lubricants   Hydraulic Brake   Delco Supreme 11  Brake Fluid   NOTE  Fluids and lubricants identified below by name    System GAME PAPE ISO  Lead ToT OF   part number or specification may be obtained from vour equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid    GM dealer  Parki
111. ch as enough water  ice or packed snow on  the road to make a  mirrored surface     and slow down  when you have any doubt     Remember  Any anti lock brake system  ABS  helps  avoid only the braking skid     4 15    Driving at Night       Night driving is more dangerous than day driving   One reason is that some drivers are likely to be  impaired    by alcohol or drugs  with night vision  problems  or by fatigue       Here are some tips on night driving     Drive defensively   Don t drink and drive     Adjust vour inside rearview mirror to reduce the  elare  rom headlamps behind you    Since you can t see as well  you may need to  slow down and keep more space between you and  other vehic       es     Slow down  especially on higher speed roads  Your  headlamps can light up only so much road ahead     In remote areas  watch for animals     If you re tired  pull off the road in a sate place  and rest     4 16                       Night Vision    No one can see as well at night as in the daytime  But as  we get older these differences increase  A 50 year old  driver may require at least twice as much light to see the  same thing at night us a 20 year old     What you do in the daytime can also affect your night  vision  For example  if you spend the day in bright  sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses  Your eyes will  have less trouble adjusting to night  But if you re  driving  don t wear sunglasses at night  They may cut  down on glare from headlamps  but they also make 
112. ches  186 9 cm          cres              55 7 inches  141 5 cm   Wheeibase                110 8 inches  281 4 cm   Tread Width  YO ack vais cede      60 4 inches  153 4 cm                     ets 60 2 inches  152 9          6 62                                                                  1 36 Engine Accessory Belt          The L36 engine uses an engine accessory belt  This  diagram shows the features connected and the routing   See  Miintenance Schedule  in the Index for when to  check th   belt     Power Steering  Generator   Air Conditioning    Crank              gt     Coolant Pump        Tensioner    6 63    27 NOTES    6 64     5   Section 7 Maintenance Schedule       This section covers the maintenance required for vour Buick  Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety   dependability and emission control performance     7 2 Introduction   7 43 Part C  Periodic Maintenance Inspections  7 4 Part     Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 45 Part D  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  7 39 Part B  Owner Checks and Services 7 47 Part E  Maintenance Record    IMPORTANT    KEEP ENGINE OIL   AT THE PROPER   LEVEL AND CHANGE AS    RECOMMENDED    Protection  Plan       Have Teri          hased the GM Protection Piun  The Plan  supplements vour new velicle warranties  See voii  Warran and Owner Assistance booklet  ar vour Buick    dealer for details     Introduction    Your Vehicle and the Environment    Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your  vehicle 
113. contact your dealer  I your radio   displays an error number  write it down and provide it to  your dealer when reporting the problem        PREV  1X  Press this button to search for the previous   selection on the tape  Your tape must have at least three  seconds of silence between each selection        PREY to  work  The sound will mute while seeking     NEXT  2   Press this button to search for the next  selection on the           Your tape must have at least three  seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to  work  The sound will mute while seeking     The SEEK left and right arrows will also find the  previous and next selections on the tape       44  3   Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly   Press it again to return to playing speed  The radio  will play while the tape reverses     Wb    4   Press this button to advance quickly to  another part of the tape  Press the button again to  return to playing speed  The radio will play while the  tape advances     SIDE  5   Press this button to change the side of the  tape that is playing         IC   6   Press this button to reduce background noise   The display will show either OFF or ON for a few  seconds when you press the button     Dolby   Noise Reduction is manufactured under a  license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation   Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of  Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation     EJECT  Press this button to remove the tape  The radio  will play  If you le
114. ct to  the same laws of physics when driving on curves  The  traction of the tires against the road surface makes it  possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn  the front wheels  If there s no traction  inertia will keep  the vehicle going in the same direction  If you ve ever  tried to steer a vehicle on wet         you ll understand this     The traction you can get in a curve depends on the  condition of your tires and the road surface  the angle at  which the curve is banked  and your speed  While  you re in a curve  speed is the one factor you   can control     Suppose vou  re steering through a sharp curve  Then  you suddenly accelerate  Both control systems     steering and acceleration    have to do their work where       the tires meet the road  Adding the sudden acceleration  can demand too much of those places  You can lose  control  Refer to  Traction Control  in the Index     What should you do if this ever happens  Ease up on the  accelerator pedal  steer the vehicle the way you want it  to vo  and slow down     Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should  adjust your speed  OF course  the posted speeds are  based on good weather and road conditions  Under less  favorable conditions you ll want to go slower     lf you need to reduce your speed us you approach a  curve  do it before you enter the curve  while your front  wheels are straight ahead    Try to adjust your speed so you can  drive  through the  curve  Maintain a reasonable  stead
115. ction Control System  If Equipped     Your vehicle may have a traction control system that  limits wheel spin  This is especially useful in slippery  road conditions  The system operates only if it senses  that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or  beginning to lose traction  When this happens  the  system works the front brakes and reduces engine power  to limit wheel spin     You may feel or hear the system working  but this  1s normal           If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction  control system begins to limit wheel spin  the cruise  control will automatically disengage  When road  conditions allow you to safely use it again  you may  re engage the cruise control   See    Cruise Control  in  the Index      When the system is on  this  warning light will come on  to let you know if there s a  problem with vour traction  control system     TRACTION    OFF    See    Traction Control System Warning Light    in the  Index  When this warning light is on  the system will not  limit wheel spin  Adjust vour driving accordingly     4 9    The traction control system automatically comes on  whenever you start your vehicle  To limit wheel spin   especially in slippery road conditions  you should  always leave the system on  But you can turn the  traction control system off if you ever need to   You  should turn the system off if vour vehicle ever gets stuck  in sand  mud  ice or snow  See  Rocking Your Vehicle   in the Index      To turn the system off  
116. ction Indicator Lamp  in  the Index        An electric fan under the hood can start up and    injure vou even when the engine is not running   Keep hands  clothing and tools away from         underhood electric fan            Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and  start a fire  These include liquids like gasoline                coolant  brake fluid  windshield washer and  other fluids  and plastic or rubber  You or others  could be burned  Be careful not to drop or spill  things that will burn onto a hot engine           Hood Release       To open the hood  first pull  the hood release handle  inside the vehicle  It is next  to the parking brake pedal  near the floor        Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the  secondary hood release  The hood latch is under the  hood  near the center  and at the front edge of the grille   Lift up on the lever as you lift up on the hood     Before closing the hood  be sure all the filler caps are on  properly  Then just pull the hood down and close it firmly        3800 Series II Engine  1 36   Code        When you open the hood  you ll see        A  Engine Coolant Recovery Tank     Engine Oil Fill Cap H  Air Cleaner  B  Battery     Automatic Transaxle Fluid     Windshield Washer Fluid      Radiator Pressure Cap Dipstick Reservoir    D  Engine Oil Dipstick G  Brake Master Cylinder       6 9    Engine Oil    lf the CHECK OIL LEVEL  light on the instrument panel  comes on  il means you need  to check your engine oi 
117. d Seat Controls    This secuon tells you about the seats    how to adjust  them    and also about reclining seathacks and  head restraints     Manual Front 5eat    You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is    moving  The sudden movement could startle and  confuse         or make you push    pedal when vou  don   t want to  Adjust the driver s seat only when  the vehicle is not moving     1 2          Pull up on the control bar under the front of the seat to  unlock it  Slide the seat to where you want it  Then  release the bar and try to move the seat with your body  to make sure the seat ts locked into place        Power Seat  If Equipped  Front Control  Raise the front of the seat by pushing  the left side of the switch  Push the right side of the  switch to lower the front of the seat     Center Control  Move the seat forward or backward by  pushing the control on the front or back  Raise the seat  by pushing the control on the left  Lower the seat by  pushing the control on the right    Rear Control  Raise the rear of the seat by pushing the  switch on the left  Lower the rear of the seat by pushing  the switch on the right        The power seat controls are on the armrest     Reclining Front Seatbacks       To adjust the seatback  lift the lever on the outer side of But don t have    seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving   the seat and move the seatback to where you want it     Kelease the lever to lock th
118. d be running  If they  aren t  your vehicle needs service     5 16       In cold weather  water can freeze and crack the  engine  radiator  heater core and other parts   Use the recommended coolant and the proper  coolant mix     How to Add Coolant to the Coolant  Recovery Tank       If you haven t found a problem yet  but the coolant  level isn   t at the FULL COLD mark  add a 50 50  mixture of clean water  preferably distilled  and  DEX COOL   silicate free  antifreeze at the  coolant recovery tank   See  Engine Coolant    in  the Index for more information            Adding only plain water to your cooling system  can be dangerous  Plain water  or some other  liquid like alcohol  can boil before the proper  coolant mix will  Your vehicle s coolant warning    system is set for the proper coolant mix  With  plain water or the wrong mix  your engine could  get too hot but vou wouldn t get the overheat  warning  Your engine could catch fire and you or  others could be burned  Use a 50 50 mix of clean  water and DEX COOL   coolant           You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot    engine parts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol  and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  enough  Don t spill coolant on a hot engine     at high speed  Never turn the cap when the  cooling system  including the radiator pressure          is hot  Wait for the cooling system and  radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to  turn the pressure cap        When the coolant in the coolant 
119. d gages that  may be on your vehicle  The pictures will help you  locate them     Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an  expensive repair or replacement  Paying attention to  your warning lights and gages could also save you or  others from injury     Warning lights come on when there may be or is     problem with one of your vehicle s functions  As you  will see in the details on the next few pages  some  warning lights come on briefly when you start the  engine just to let you know they re working  If vou are  familiar with this section  vou should not be alarmed  when this happens     Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  with one af your vehicles functions  Often gages and  warning lights work together to let you know when  there s a prablem with your vehicle        When one of the warning lights comes on and stavs on  when you are driving  or when one of the gages shows  there may be a problem  check the section that tells you  what to do about it  Please follow this manual s advice   Waiting to do repairs can be costly    and even  dangerous  So please get to know your warning lights  and gages  They re a big help     Safety Belt Reminder Light    When the key is turned to RUN or START  a chime will  come on for about eight seconds to remind people to  fasten their safety belts     The safety belt light will  also come on and stay on         about 70 seconds  If the  driver s belt is alr
120. d note how you drive  If you have any  questions on how to keep your vehicle in good  condition  see your Buick dealer     This part tells you the maintenance services you should  have done and when you should schedule them     vou       to your dealer for your service needs  you ll know  that GM trained and supported service people will  perform the work using genuine GM parts     7 4    The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed        Part D  Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses  these       parts should be replaced and all necessary  repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle     These schedules are for vehicles that        curry passengers and cargo within recommended  limits  You will find these limits on your vehicles  Tire Loading Information label  See  Loading Your  Vehicle  in the Index         are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  driving limits         use the recommended fuel  See  Fuel  in the Index   Selecting the Right Schedule    First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules is  right for your vehicle  Here s how to decide which  schedule te follow        Maintenance Schedule    Short Trip City Definition       Follow the Short Trip Citv Maintenance Schedule tf any   one of these conditions ts true for your vehicle       Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles  8 to 16         This 1s particularly important when outside  temperatures are below freezing    e Most trips include extensive idling  such as fre
121. d type  see    Normal Maintenance Replacement  Parts  in the Index     6 38       Tires   Your new Buick comes with high quality tires made by  a leading tire manufacturer  If you ever have questions  about your tire warranty and where to obtain service  see  your Buick Warranty booklet for details     Poorly maintained and improperly used tires  are dangerous     Overloading your tires can cause    overheating as a result of too much friction   You could have an air out and a serious  accident  See    Loading Your Vehicle  in  the Index     CAUTION   Continued        NOTICE       Underinflated tires pose the same danger as  overloaded tires  The resulting accident  could cause serious injury  Check all tires  frequently to maintain the recommended  pressure  Tire pressure should be checked  when your tires are cold     Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or  overinflation is all right  It s not  If your tires  don t have enough air  underinflation   vou can  get the following    Too much flexing   Too much heat   Tire overloading   Bad wear   Bad handling          fuel economy     Overinflated tires are more likely to he cut   punctured      broken by a sudden   impact    such as when you hit a pothole   Keep tires at the recommended pressure   Worn  old tires can cause accidents  If your  tread is badly worn  or if vour tires have  been damaged  replace them     If your tires have too much air  overinflation    vou can get the following    Unusual wear   Bad handl
122. ds        When towing a trailer  so there is less shifting  between gears          When going down a steep hill              n    SECOND  2   This position gives you more power but    lower fuel economy  You can use SECOND  2  on hills     It can help control your speed as you go down steep  mountain roads  but then you would also want to use  your brakes off and on     Don t drive in SECOND  2  for more than 5 miles  i8 km   or ai speeds over 55 mph  88 km h   or vou  can damage your transaxle  Use AUTOMATIC    OVERDRIVE  H  or THIRD  3  as much   as possible    Don t shift into SECOND  2  unless you are going  slower than 65 mph  105 km h   or vou can  damage your engine        FIRST  1   This position gives vou even more power   but lower fuel economy  than SECOND  2   You can  use it on very steep hills  or in deep snow or mud  If  the selector lever is put in FIRST  1   the transaxle  won t shift into First gear until the vehicle is going  slowly enough     NOTICE     If  vour front wheels can t rotate  don t try to  drive  This might happen if you were stuck in  very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid  object  You could damage your transaxle    Also  if you stop when going uphill  don   t hold  your vehicle there with only the accelerator  pedal  This could overheat and damage the  transaxle  Use your brakes or shift into PARK        to hold your vehicle in position on    hill           Parking Brake    This vehicle has a PUSH  TO RELEASE parking     brake peda
123. e D  symbol will appear in the display     SOURCE  Press this button to change to the tape or  disc function when the radio is on  If both a tape and     disc are installed  the system will first go to tape play   TAPE SIDE and an arrow will appear on the display  If  SOURCE is pressed again  the system will go to disc  play  CD PLAY will appear on the display        EJECT  The system has two EJECT buttons  Press   the button near the CD slot to remove a disc  Press the  button near the tape slot to remove a tape and the radio  will play  If vou leave a cassette tape in the player while  listening to the radio  it may become warm     CLN  If this message appears on the display  the  cassette tape player needs to be cleaned  It will still   play tapes  but vou should clean it as soon as possible   to prevent damage to the tapes and player  See    Care of  Your Cassette Tape Player  in the Index  After you clean  the player  press and hold EJECT for five seconds to  reset the CLN indicator  The radio will display     to  show the indicator was reset     Your cassette tape player automatically reduces  background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby  MR  You may turn Dolby off by pressing the  number six preset     Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license  trom Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation  Dolby  and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  Laboratories Licensing Corporation        Playing a Compact Disc    Insert a disc partway into the slot  label 
124. e LEE eto Remote Control Minor 1    IRIS 2 50  Oil Level Warning Light             Pope oor das 2 69 edam baad                               Oil Pressure Light           St Go O QM EHE SIM nig    eap XD SPAREN 69   Overdrive  Automatic Transaxle                     2 25 Windows EI                 mr            errem b oa Eia 2 33  Overheating Bngime   eere rr ntn 5 13 POS MED the of Safet  Belts SEO                 Ke Ke Ted          1 18  Owner Checks and 5                                      1 39 Deshler Un ihe Road y T cp rorem    E               5 1  GUAE TUDDCHUONIS USER es rete                          9710 Publications  Service and Owner                      8 9  Pn Spotting  Chemical      2 222222 52  ve 6 52              5 19              E Radiator Pressure          v pales acea      Automatic Transaxle                            2525                                         1 34  Shifting 177                                                   2   Radios         3 12  3 14  3 18  3 22  3 25  B SUME                            one at hee pe ee                   2       4 18  ark ng adli Vo  A ar a a om a GS EI Tea      s dee ar I ree Da i            str UNE 3s  Brake                             2 22        2 27 Door Security Locks  vede pene RR   n ipa 2 8  Brake Mechanism Check                         ae Outside Seat Posidoli 2 22 2222    1 27  Lots                      eee enne ener  2 13 Safety Belt Comfort Guides        eui OT Ee        1 30  Over Things That Burn 
125. e engine coolant temperature and the  outside temperature  Pushing the                FLOW or  FRONT buttons will override this delay  turn off the  AUTO setting and change the fan speed        Manual Operation    You may also manually adjust the air delivery or   fan speed    AIR FLOW  This button is used to change the direction  of the airflow  The airflow choices available are  FLOOR  FLOOR MID  MID and  WINDSHIELD FLOOR  If the system is set for AUTO   pressing the AIR FLOW button will display the current  airflow direction and the comfort setting  Press the AIR  FLOW up or down button again to change the direction  af the airflow     If the AIR FLOW up button is selected while in the  FRONT defrost mode  the system will direct the air  toward the WINDSHIELD FLOOR  If the AIR FLOW  down button ts selected while in the FRONT defrost  mode  the system will direct the air toward the FLOOR   and the FRONT defrost mode will cancel  Notice the  arrows in the display     3 5    OFF  If the passenger comfort control is turned on  it         be turned off by pressing the OFF button once   Pressing the OFF button a second time will turn off the  main system  Turning off the main system causes the fan       turn off and the airflow to be directed to the FLOOR   The system will still try to keep the interior of the  vehicle at the previous chosen comfort setting  The  outside temperature will show on the display when the  system is OFF     The ventilation system always allows fresh a
126. e footnote      Also see footnote            ACTUAL MILEAGE      SERVICED BY     DATE       ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY         7 29          Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule    22 500 Miles  37 500 km     C  Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote       _  Lubricate chassis components  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote ft     _  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information    See footnote        ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 30    30 000 Miles  50 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote         Lubricate chassis components  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote        _  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information    See footnote      Also see footnote               Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule    37 500 Miles  62 500 km         Replace air cleaner filter  _  Change engine oil and filter  or every  Au Emission Control Service  12 months  whichever occurs first      E  Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage An Emission Control Service   See footnote      or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any    Lubricate chassis components  or every  damage  Replace parts as needed  12 
127. e seatback  Pull up on the  lever and the seat will go to an upright position         N CAUTION   Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is    in motion        be dangerous  Even if you buckle    CAUTION   Continued            Safety Belts  They re for Everyone    This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts  up  your safety belts can t do their job when properly  It also tells vou some things you should not do  vou re reclined like this  with safety belts    The shoulder belt can t do its job because it And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System  wan t be against your body  Instead  it will bein    585   or air bag system    front of you  In a erash you could go into it   receiving neck or other injuries     The lap belt can t do its job either  In a crash the  belt could go up over vour abdomen  The belt  forces would be there  not at your pelvic bones   This could cause serious internal injuries    For proper protection when the vehicle is in  motion  have the seatback upright  Then sit well  back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly     Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear     safety belt properly  If you are in a crash and  youre not wearing a safety belt  your injuries    can be much worse  You can hit things inside the  vehicle or be ejected from it  You can be seriously  injured or killed  In the same crash  vou might  not be if vou are buckled up  Always fasten your  Head Restraints safety belt  and check that your 
128. e sure it is secure  If  the belt isn t long enough  see    Safety Belt  Extender    at the end of this section             sure the release button on the buckle is  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  safety belt quickly if you ever had to     1 1    The lap part of the belt should be worm low and snug on  the hips  just touching the thighs  In a crash  this applies  force to the strong pelvic bones  And you d be less likely  to slide under the lap belt  If you slid under it  the belt  would apply force at your abdomen  This could cause  serious or even fatal injuries  The shoulder belt should go  over the shoulder and across the chest  These parts of the  body are best able to take belt restraining forces     The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash        Li                                                M      Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster To move it down  squeeze the release handle and move  the height adjuster to the desired position  You can move  the adjuster up just by pushing up on the bottom of the  release handle  After you move the adjuster to where  you want iL try to move it down without squeezing the  release handle to make sure it has locked into position   Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is  centered on your shoulder  The belt should be away from  your face and neck  but not falling off your shoulder     Before you begin to drive  move the shoulder belt  adjuster to the height that is right for you      
129. e that your  brake pedal moves a little  This is normal     If there s a problem with the  anti lock brake system  this  warning light will stay        See    Anti Lock Brake  System Warning Light  in  the Index     The anti lock system can change the brake pressure  faster than any driver could  The computer 18  programmed to make the most of available tire and  road conditions        Here s how anti lock works  Let s say the road is wet   You re driving safely  Suddenly      animal jumps out in  front of you        You slam on the brakes  Here s what happens with ABS     A computer senses that wheels are slowing down  If one You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard   of the wheels is about to stop rolling  the computer will  separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the  rear wheels     As you brake  your computer keeps receiving updates on  wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly     4 8       Remember  Anti lock doesn t change the time you need  to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease  stopping distance  If you get too close to the vehicle in  front of you  vou won t have time to apply your brakes  if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops  Always leave  enough room up ahead to stop  even though you have  anti lock brakes     Using Anti Lock    Don t pump the brakes  Just hold the brake pedal down  and let anti lock work for you  You may feel the system  working  or you may notice some noise  but this is normal     Tra
130. e tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information    See footnote      Also see footnote           DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY     DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY                 99 000 Miles  165 000 km  100 000 Miles  166 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every     Inspect spark plug wires   3 months  whichever occurs first   An Emission Contral Service   An Emission Control Service   See footnote       Replace spark plugs     An Emission Control Service    C  Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter  if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or  more of these conditions             heavy city traffic where the outside  temperature regularly reaches 90  F   32  C  or higher        ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY           Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule      In hilly or mountainous terrain        When doing frequent trailer towing        Uses such as found in taxi  police or  delivery service    If vou do not use vour vehicle under any of these   conditions  the fluid and filter do not require changing     ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY              150 000 Miles  240 000 km     C  Drain  flush and refill cooling system   or every 60 months since last service   whichever occurs first   See  Engine  Coolant  in the Index for what to use   Inspect hoses  Clean radiator  condenser   pressure cap and neck  Pressure test  cooling system and pressure cap    An Emission Control Service    AC
131. e warm     CLN  If this message appears on the displav  the  cassette tape player needs to be cleaned  It will still   play tapes  but you should clean it as soon as possible   to prevent damage to the tapes and player  See  Care of  Your Cassette Tape Player  in the Index  After you clean  the player  press and hold            for five seconds to  reset the CLN indicator  The radio will display     to  show the indicator was reset     AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player  and Automatic Tone Control       Plaving the Radio    VOLUME  Press this knob to turn the system on and  off  To increase volume  turn the knob clockwise  Turn  it counterclockwise to decrease the volume     RECALL  Press this button briefly to recall the station  being played or to display the clock  To change what is  normally shown on the display  station or time   press  the button until you see the display you want  then hold  the button until the display flashes  If you press the  button when the ignition is off  the clock will show for     few seconds     Finding a Station               Press this button to switch between       FMI  and FM2  The display shows your selection     TUNE  Press the up or down arrow to choose radio  stallions     SEEK  Press the up or down arrow to go to the next  higher or lower station and stay there  The sound will  mute while seeking     SCAN  Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds  und SCAN will appear on the display  Use SCAN to  listen to stations for a few s
132. eady  buckled  neither the chime  nor the light will come on        Air Bag Readiness Light    There is an air hag readiness light on the instrument  panel  which shows AIR BAG  The system checks the  air bag s electrical system lor malfunctions  The light  tells you if there is an electrical problem  The system  check includes the air bag sensors  the air        modules     the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module     For more information on the air bag system  see    Air  Bag  in the Index     AIR BAG       Gage Cluster    Standard Cluster    2 60    This light will come on when you start vour engine  and  it will flash for a few seconds  Then the light should go        This means the system 15 ready     If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the  engine or comes on when you are driving  your air bag  system may not work properly  Have your vehicle  serviced right away     The air bag readiness light should flash for a few  seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN  If the  light doesn t come on then  have it fixed so it will be  ready to warn you if there is a problem        Battery System Warning Light    When vou turn the kev to  RUN  this light will turn on  briefly  to show that vour  generator and battery  charging systems   are working        If the light stays on  you need service and you should  take your Buick to the dealer at once  To save your  battery until you get there  turn off all accessories and  set vour climate control 
133. ease the fan speed   push the top of the FAN button  Notice the fan  indicators in the display     Mode Controls    Press the AIR FLOW button to deliver air through the  floor  middle or windshield outlets  The system will stay  im the selected mode until the AUTO button is pushed   Press the up arrow on the AIR FLOW button to cycle  through the available modes     Automatic Operation    Press the AUTO button when you want the system Lo  automatically adjust to changes in the temperature inside  the vehicle  the outside temperature and the sun load   on the vehicle  When the system is ser for automatic  operation  air will come from the floor  middle or  windshield outlets depending on the temperature inside  the vehicle  the outside temperature and sun load  Fan  speed will vary as the system gets to and maintains the  comfort setting vou have selected through the use of the  TEMP button     To find your comfort setting  start with the system in  AUTO mode and the TEMP button adjusted to 75  F   24  C   give the vehicle about 20 minutes to stabilize   and adjust your comfort setting if necessary  by using  the TEMP button  The display will show the comfort  setting for a few seconds and then it will display the  outside temperature  If you want to see your current  automatic fan speed  airflow direction and comfort  setting  press the ALTTO button     In cold weather  the system will delay turning on the  fan  to avoid blowing cold air  The length of the delay  depends on th
134. econds  The radio will go to  a station  stop          few seconds  then go on to the next  station  Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop  scanning  The sound will mute while scanning        PUSHBUTTONS         six numbered pushbuttons let  you return to your favorite stations  You can set up to   8 stations  six AM  six        and six FMI   Just     1  Turn the radio on   J  Press AM FM to select the band   Tune in the desired station     Press TONE to select the setting you preter     ta d ie    Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons  The  sound will mute  When it returns  release the button   Whenever you press that numbered button  the  station vou set will retum and the tone you selected  will be automatically selected for that button     6  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     P SCAN  Press this button to listen to each of your  preset stations for a few seconds  The radio will go to  the first preset station  stop for a few seconds  then go  on to the next preset station  Press P SCAN again to stop  scanning  If a preset station has weak reception  the  radio will not stop at the preset station    AUTO SET  Press this button and the system will seek  and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest       stations on your preset buttons  depending on which       band  AM or FM  you are listening to   AUTO SET  will flash while seeking and will remain on until this  function 15 complete  To return to the stations you  manually set  press AUTO SET again   
135. ee ate 6 13  When to Change REA Rae ela Ca o XOU sor af                 6 13   Entry Lighting  Delayed             2 44                        rU Ee                      ETE NE 6 4   Exhaust              eret nnn E 2 31   Exit Lighting  Delayed                              2 44   Express Down Window       ee eee 2 33   Exterior                                       2 41    9 4    Fasc Cleaning                      Fan Control  Climate Control System T 3 2  3 4  Filling Your Tank   ial a      pan 09  PET                        Ea En                   6 14  Filter  Engine Oil                       2222      6 13  Finish Cms uo odas quede pb a ER HARDER CE RR 6 51  Fish CATA I    e                   ERRAT 6 52  First Gear  Automatic Transaxle                     2 26  Flashers  Hazard Warning                         gt     2 2  Flat Tie  Changing        9 re rn hd 5 22  Fluids and Lubricants       I 7 45  Foreign Countries  Fuel                      22     6 4  French Language Manual    24 6 4 on II ii  Front Towing         eet ttr 5 10  Diii o rese        P E dad ie da EROR METER A        8 3             ce cig            IE EIE ETIN 6 3  Filling Your Tank                                6 3  Gage                2 71  In Foreign Countries Asus 6 4  Fuses and Circuit Breakers    6 56  Gares  Engine Coolant Temperature                      2 65  Engine Oil Pressure                              2 68            2 71  GANE  ri                       beate Ka on    eR  Gear Positions  
136. eels ok erae cer rmm EP  PTSL benk EPEn EIR    eM            ceo  2 24  7 41                Lampa Lenses 2 222  2     2  2  2    6 30  Bulb Replacement oie esse            emnes   6 29                        TILES Hn TE 6 47  Glass Surfaces                                          A 6 49           Inside of Your                                         6 47  anadian Roadside Assistance                      8 5 Instrument Panel EUM             e a           ads 6 49  Capacities and 5                                           2  6761        ci    RUFI ee T op ah                 a ROTE   e          6 49  Carbon Monoxide    2                 2     2 3  4 5   Outside of Your Buick By On tap dV fay PEE PERS      6 50  Care of Your Cassette Tape                           Sree M Special Problems                               6   8  Cassette Deck Service                           7 39                                Cassette Tape Player                     3   16  3 20  3 27 Tims     A 7 8282  Cassette Tape Player Care             rA  WERE ES                                                         cas     Center Passenger Position                          1 29 Windshield and Wiper Blades                     6 50  Certification Label Kn              USE                  icis 4 31 Climate Control  Steermg Wheel Touch Control         3 11  Certification Tire Label                            4 31 Climate Control System   POR          coset cur           Chains  Safety                       
137. ehicle   This may not he so obvious  You increase the  chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a  crash if the doors aren t locked  Wear safety belts  properly  lock vour doors  and you will be far  better off whenever you drive your vehicle     There are several wavs to lock and unlock your vehicle        From the outside  use your door key or Remote Keyless  Entry transmitter  1f equipped   With your door key   turning the key toward the rear of the vehicle will lock  the door  Turning the key toward the front of the vehicle  will unlock it     If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system and it is activated   unlock the doors only with the key or Remote Keyless  Entry System  This will avoid setting off the alarm     To lock the door from the  inside  slide the lock control  on the door down  To  unlock the door  slide the  lock control up     aa    Power Door Locks    With power door locks  vou  can lack or unlock all the  doors of vour vehicle   using the driver s or   front passenger s door   lock switch        The switch on each rear door works only that door s  lock  It won t lock  or unlock  all of the doors    that s a  safety feature        Memory Door Locks  If Equipped     Close your doors and turn on the ignition  Every time  you move your shift lever out of PARK  P   all of the  doors will lock  And  every time you stop and move  your shift lever into PARK  P   your doors will unlock   I  someone needs to get out while you re not in   PARK        have that
138. em only   for some time  the system may need repair  See your  Buick dealer     Defogging and Defrosting    If you have the electronic touch system  adjust the  TEMPERATURE lever toward WARM and the FAN  lever toward HIGH     If vou have the Dual Automatic Comfortemp system   use the FRONT button to defog or defrost the  windshield  By choosing this button  the airflow will be  directed at the windshield  Adjust vour comfort level       pressing the TEMP up or down arrow  The fan speed  will be controlled      the system  You can change the fan  speed      pressing the top of the FAN button to increase  speed  and the bottom of the button to decrease speed             reduce the chance of fogging your windows in cold  weather  using the electronic touch system  select HTR  to supply air through the floor outlets  Then move the  FAN lever to HIGH for a few moments before driving  away  This will blow moist air from the intake outlets  toward the floor  not the windshield  If you have the  Dual Automatic Comfortemp system  the AUTO setting  will do this for you  Manual operation of the automatic  comftortemp system in the FLOOR mode will also  supply air through the floor outlets     Kear Window Defogger    The lines you see on the  rear window warm the  glass  Press this button to  start warming your window        After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself  or pressing the  button during the heating cycle will turn it off  If you  need additional warming time  push the button
139. ems        This system is called OBD II  On Board  Diagnostics Second Generation  and is intended to  assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for   the life of the vehicle  helping to produce a cleaner  environment   In Canada  OBD II is replaced by  Enhanced Diagnostics   The CHECK ENGINE light  comes      to indicate that there is    problem and service  is required  Malfunctions often will be indicated by the  system before any problem is apparent  This may  prevent more serious damage to your vehicle  This  system is also designed to assist your service technician  in correctly diagnosing any malfunction     NOTICE     If you keep driving your vehicle with this light  on  after a while  vour emission controls may not  work as well  your fuel economy may not be as  good and your engine may not run as smoothly   This could lead to costly repairs that may not be  covered by vour warranty        This light should come on  as a check      show you it is  working  when the ignition is on and the engine is not  running  If the light doesn t come on  have it repaired   This light will also come on during    malfunction in one  of two ways     e Light Flashing    A misfire condition has been  detected  A misfire increases vehicle emissions and  may damage the emission control system on your  vehicle  Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis  and service is required        Light On Steady     An emission control system  malfunction has been detected on your vehicle   Dea
140. en driven  It could fail suddenly  and cause an accident  If vou have to replace     wheel  use    new GM original equipment wheel     NOTICE     The wrong wheel can also cause problems with  bearing life  brake cooling  speedometer or  odometer calibration  headlamp aim  bumper  height  vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire  chain clearance to the body and chassis        see  Changing a Flat Tire  in the Index for  more information       6 45       Tire Chains and instructions  And always open your doors or  windows when you re cleaning the inside     NOTICE  Never use these to clean your vehicle       Gasoline    Use tire chains only where legal and only when  you must  Use only SAE Class        type chains  that are the proper size for your tires  Install  them on the front tires and tighten them as    e Benzene           lightly as possible with the ends securely    Acetone                   Naphtha    Carbon Tetrachlonde    fastened  Drive slowly and follow the chain    i   Paint Thinner  manufacturer s instructions  If vou can hear the    Turpentine    chains contacting your vehicle  stop and retighten  them  If the contact continues  slow down until it  stops  Driving too fast or spinning the wheels  with chains on will damage your vehicle     Lacquer Thinner       Nui Polish Remover       They        all be hazardous    some more than  others    and they can all damage your vehicle             A ppearance Care Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can
141. enser   If you do not use your vehicle under any of these pressure cap and neck  Pressure test the  conditions  the fluid and filter do not require changing  cooling system and pressure cap    An Emission Control Service         Uses such as found in taxi  police or  delivery service     ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY  ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY                 Part B  Owner Checks and Services  Listed below are owner checks and services which  should he performed at the intervals specified to help  ensure the safety  dependability and emission control  performance of your vehicle    Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once   Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your  vehicle  make sure they are the proper ones  us shown in    Part D   At Each Fuel Fill    It ds Important for vou or a service station attemdant to  perform these underhood checks at euch fuel fil     Engine Oil Level Check    Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if  necessary  See  Engine Oil    in the Index for  further details     Engine Coolant Level Check    Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL    coolant mixture if necessary  See  Engine Coolant    in  the Index for further details     Windshield Washer FIuid Level Check    Check the windshield washer fluid level in the  windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if  necessary  See  Windshield Washer Fluid  in the Index  tor further details     At Least Once a Month    Tire Inflation Check   Make sure tires a
142. ent  make sure the body repair shop  applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or  replaced to restore corrosion protection    Finish Damage   Any stone chips  fractures or deep scratches in the finish  should be repaired right away  Bare metal will corrode  quickly and may develop inta a major repair expense   Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up  materials available from your dealer or other service  outlets  Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected  in your dealer s body and paint shop    6 52    Underbody Maintenance    Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  control can collect on the underbody  If these are not  removed  accelerated corrosion  rust         occur on the  underbody parts such as fuel lines  frame  floor   pan and exhaust system even though they have  corrosion protection     At least every spring  flush these materials from the  underbody with plain water  Clean any areas where mud  and other debris can collect  Dirt packed in closed areas  of the frame should be loosened before being flushed   Your dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system  can do this for you    Chemical Paint Spotting   Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create     chemical fallout  Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  attack painted surfaces on your vehicle  This damage  can take two forms  blotchy  ringlet shaped  discolorations  and small irregular dark spots etched into  the paint surface     Although no defect in the pa
143. enter passenger position     Supplemental Restraint System  SRS   This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System   SRS  or air bag system    Your Buick has two air bags    one air bag for the driver  and another air bag for the right front passenger        Here are the most important things to know about the air  bag system     You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if  you aren t wearing vour safety belt    even if you  have air bags  Wearing your safety belt during a  crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things  inside the vehicle or being ejected from it  Air  bags are    supplemental restraints    to the safety  belts  All air bags are designed to work with  safety belts  but don t replace them  Air bags are  designed to work only in moderate to severe  crashes where the front of your vehicle hits  something  They aren t designed to inflate at all  in rollover  rear  side or low speed frontal  crashes  Everyone in your vehicle should wear a  safety belt properly    whether or not there s an  air bag for that person        Air bags inflate with great force  faster than the  blink of an eye  If vou re too close to an inflating  air bag  it could seriously injure vou  Safety belts  help keep you in position before and during a  crash  Always wear vour safety helt  even with air  bags  The driver should sit as far back as possible  while still maintaining control of the vehicle     AIR BAG       Gage Cluster Standard Cluster    There is an air bag readine
144. ents  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote        L  Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote        ACTUAL MILEAGE          SERVICED BY     60 000 Miles  100 000 km       Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service   See footnote       _  Lubricate chassis components  or every   12 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote            Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote      Also see footnote            Inspect engine accessory drive belt    An Emission Control Service     Continued   7 33       Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule    60 000 Miles  100 000 km   Continued  67 500 Miles  112 500 km        Replace air cleaner filter  L  Change engine oil and filter  or every  An Emission Control Service  12 months  whichever occurs first         Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage An Emission Control Service   See footnote      or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any  _  Lubricate chassis components  or every  damage  Replace parts as needed    12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service   See footnoteY      See footnote               Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information    See fo
145. er your shoulder  and  start your left lane change signal before moving out  of the right lane to pass  When you are far enough  ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your  inside mirror  activate vour right lane change signal  and move back into the right lane   Remember that  your right outside mirror is convex  The vehicle you  just passed may seem to be farther away from you  than it really is     Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on  two lane roads  Reconsider before passing the   next vehicle    Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly   Even though the brake lamps are not flashing  it may  be slowing down or starting to turn     If you re being passed  make it easy for the  following driver to get ahead of you  Perhaps you  can ease a little to the right     Loss of Control    Let s review what driving experts say about what  happens when the three control systems  brakes  steering  and acceleration  don t have enough friction where the  tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked     In any emergency  don t give up  Keep trying to steer and  constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger     Skidding    In a skid  a driver can lose control of the vehicle   Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  care suited to existing conditions  and      not   overdriving  those conditions  But skids are   always possihle     The three types of skids correspond to your Buick  s  three control systems  In the braking 
146. ercere rare      2 20  Shoulder Belt Height                                   1 13  Sighaling              ES 2 33  SEDE               a etri eee aa 4 15  Sound Equipment  Adding   rS CET E EIE 1 34  5pare Tire  E TO OCURRE 5 36  Specifications and                                          6761  Specifications                                           6 62  Speech Impaired  Customer Assistance              0  8 4           oi ol sov      Rare             2 58    AME  eram wmwius Puis          Ee  Dd xus 1 19  Stains  Cleaning            6 48  Starter Suwirch Chick    222122         7 41  Craine                   c c secreta                                5 13  SEDE erae kx CC Cea E bea     we 22 4 10       VRPT ESS a perenne een es baie cere               4 12  Magnasieer          MSS PUR Pe RSS 4 10  POWELL opor beeen UE     4 10  Tips  ra wes                       E NI 4 11  Wheal  Tks eae d 2 1  Wheel Touch Controls                       3 11  3 33  Storage Compartments   2                 2 41              6 28  Stuck  In Sand  Mud  lee or Snow                 4 38  Sun Visors 2  2 53  Supplemental Restraint System        1 19  Symbols  Vehicle             BE uid ade n X  Tickor EAE TAEA r    22 58  Taillamp Bulb                                            732  Tape Player Care                    law ats Wel Se eruere si  Temperature Control  Climate Control System  s 3 2  3 4  Temperature Control  Passenger           3 11                        ue                     Rura 
147. eriodic  Maintenance Inspections  following     Footnotes     The U S  Environmental Protection Agency or the  California Air Resources Board has determined that the  failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullity the  emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the  completion of the vehicle s useful life  We  however  urge  that all recommended maintenance services be performed ut  the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded      Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage   transaxle shift linkage  parking brake cable guides and  underbody contact points      Tf your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor  the  monitor will show you when to change the oil    usually  between 3 000 miles  5 WW  kmh and 7 500 miles    Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule     12 500 km  since your last oil change  Under   severe conditions  the indicator may come on before  3 000 miles  5 OOU km   Never drive your vehicle more  than 7 500 miles  12 500 km  or 12 months   whichever  occurs first   without an oil change     The system won t detect dust in the oil  So if you drive  in a dusty area be sure to change your oil every   3 000 miles  5 000 km  or sooner if the CHANGE OIL  light comes on  Remember to reset the Oil Lite Monitor  when the oil has been changed  For more information   see  Engine Oil Life Monitor  in the Index          good time to check your brakes is during tire  rotation  See    Brake System Inspection    under  Periodic  Maintenance In
148. ers indicator lights               MASTER   F1     WINDSHIELD  CAUTION dere   LIGHTING   WIPER  POSSIBLE SWITCH  5 ENGINE Fuse      INJURY COOLANT _ E                EE TEMP  DOOR LOCK TURN WINDSHIELD       P     eves UNLOCK   sionals el  gt  washer  i 7 BETTER pr  SIEL   CHARGING       passio  PARKING     SYSTEM    E   CAUSTIC          LAMPS WINDSHIELD j T        POO      DEFROSTER   MAKE         SEAT    BELTS HAZARD  WARNING      FLASHER 4    REAR 0   CODLANT        SPEAKER       WINDOW  POWER       AME    DEFOGGER  winpow L E sures  7   ENGINE OIL    ME          FUEL m     _   VENTILATING         P                       Ga       LAMPS             88  Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems       Here vou ll find information about the seats in your Buick and how to use your safety belts properly  You ean also  learn about some things you should net do with air bags and safety belts     1 2  1 5  1 10    Seats and Seat Controls   Safety Belts  They re for Everyone   Here Are Questions Many People Ask About  Safety Belts    and the Answers   How to Wear Safety Belts Properly   Driver Position   Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy   Right Front Passenger Position   Supplemental Restraint System  SRS   Center Passenger Position    Rear Seat Passengers   Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children         Small Adults   Children   Child Restraints   Larger Children   Safety Belt Extender   Checking Your Restraint Systems   Replacing Restraint System Parts After   a Crash    Seats an
149. ers who aren t safety belted can be thrown  out af the vehicle in a crash  And they can strike others  in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts     Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions       Lap Shoulder Beli    The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder  belts  Here s how to wear one properly        I  Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you   Don t let it get twisted     2  Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks     1 27          If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle  tilt the  latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it   Pull up on the latch plate to make sure It is secure   If the belt is not long enough  see    Safety Bell  Extender  at the end of this section  Make sure the  release button on the buckle is positioned so you  would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if  you ever had ta     1 28      To make the lap part tight  pull down on the buckle  end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part        You             seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is  too loose  In a crash  you would move forward  too much  which could increase injury  The  shoulder belt should fit against your body        The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  the hips  just touching the thighs  In a crash  this applies  force to the strong pelvic bones  And you d be less likely  to slide under the lap belt  If you shd under it  the belt  would apply force at your abdomen  This could cause  serious or eve
150. evel      Park your vehicle on a level place  Keep the  engine running    e With the parking brake applied  place the shift lever  in PARK           e With your foot on the brake pedal  move the shift  lever through each pear range  pausing for about  three seconds in each range  Then  position the shift  lever in PARK  P      e Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes     6 17    Then  without shutting off the engine  follow these steps     1  The transaxle fluid  dipstick top is     round loop and is  next to the brake  master eylinder  behind the engine  block  Pull out the  dipstick and wipe it  with a clean rag or  paper towel        3  n E    Check both sides of the dipstick  and read the lower  level  The fluid level must be in the cross hatched area        4  Ifthe fluid level is in the acceptable range  push the  2  Push it back in all the way  wait three seconds and dipstick back in all the way   then pull it back out again        6 18    How to Add Fluid    Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what  kind of transaxle fluid to use  See    Recommended  Fluids and Lubricants    in the Index     It the fluid level is low  add only enough of the proper  fluid to bring the level into the cross hatched area on  the dipstick     1  Pull out the dipstick     2  Using    long neck funnel  add enough fluid at the  dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level     It doesn t take much fluid  generally less than one  pint  0 5 L            overfill     NOT
151. ey  may not even work at all  This could cause a  crash  Always use the proper brake fluid           6 26    Brake Wear   Your Buick has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes   Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a  high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn         new pads are needed  The sound may come and go or  be heard all the time your vehicle is moving  except when  you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly      The brake wear warning sound means that soon    vour brakes won t work well  That could lead to  an accident  When you hear the brake wear  warning sound  have your vehicle serviced        NOTICE     Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads  could result in costly brake repair           Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake  squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly  applied  This does not mean something is wrong with  your brakes     See  Caliper Knuckle Maintenance Inspection  in  Section 7 of this manual under Part C  Periodic  Maintenance Inspections      Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  prevent brake pulsation  When tires are rotated  inspect  brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the  proper sequence      GM specifications     Your rear drum brakes don t have wear indicators  but it  you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise  have the rear  brake linings inspected  Also  the rear brake drums should  be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed  for 
152. ey must be clean and dry before it s  inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start  If the  engine does not start and the SECURITY light turns on   the key may he dirty or wet  Turn the ignition off     Clean and dry the key  Wait about three minutes and try  again  If the starter still won t work  and the key appears  to be clean and dry  wait about three minutes and try  another ignition key  At this time  you may also want to  check the fuse  see    Fuses and Circuit Breakers    in the  Index   If the starter won t work with the other key  your  vehicle needs service  If your vehicle does start  the first  ignition key may be faulty  See your Buick dealer or a  locksmith who can service the PASS Key II    If you accidentally use    key that has a damaged or  missing resistor pellet  the starter won t work  and the  SECURITY light will flash  But you don t have to wait  three minutes before trying another ignition key     See vour Buick dealer or a locksmith who can service  the PASS Key II to have a new key made     If you re ever driving and the SECURITY light turns on  and stays on  you will be able to restart your engine if  you turn it off  Your PASS Kev II system  however  is  noL working properly and must be serviced by your  Buick dealer  Your vehicle is not protected by the  PASS Key II system    If you lose or damage    PASS Key II ignition key  see  vour Buick dealer or a locksmith who can service  PASS Key IT to have a new key made        New Vehicle    
153. f a tire goes flat  avoid further tire and wheel damage  by driving slowly to a level place  Turn on your hazard  warming flashers     Changing a tire can cause an injury  The vehicle  can slip off the jack and roll over vou or other  people  You and they could he badly injured   Find a level place to change your tire  To help  prevent the vehicle from moving     1  Set the parking brake firmly   2  Put the shift lever in PARK  P    3  Turn olT the engine     To be even more certain the vehicle won t move   vou can put blocks at the front and rear of the  tire farthest away from the one being changed   That would be the tire on the other side of the  vehicle  at the opposite end        Removing the Spare Tire and Tools       The following steps will tell vou how to use the jack and  change             The box that stores the  jack and wrench 15 on the    passenger side trunk wall     The equipment you ll  need is in the trunk   Pull the carpeting from  the floor of the trunk  Turn the center  retainer bolt on the  spare tire cover  counterclockwise   to remove it              the box and then twist  the wing bolt a one quarter  turn counterclockwise        Lift and remove the cover  See    Compact Spare Tire   later in this section for more information about the    Remove the jack and wheel wrench   CANTI pact spare     Remove the spare tire from the trunk        Removing Wheel Covers and Wheel  Nut Caps       The tools you ll be using include the jack  A  and wheel  wrench  
154. f these  When it s time  for a new battery  we recommend a Delco Freedom  buttery  Get one that has the replacement number shown  on the original battery s label     Vehicle Storage    I you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more   take off the black  negative     cable from the battery  This  will help keep your battery from running down     Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas    that can explode  You can be badly hurt if vou  aren t careful  See    Jump Starting  in the Index  for tips on working around a battery without  getting hurt        Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle  for longer storage periods     Also  for your audio system  see    Thett Deterrent  Feature  in the Index        6 28      Bulb Replacement Headlamps    For the bulb types to be used in the following This procedure is for both the driver s and passenger s  procedures  see  Replacement Bulbs  in the Index  side headlamps     Halogen Bulbs    Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and    can burst if vou drop or scratch the bulb  You or  others could be injured  Be sure to read and  follow the instructions on the bulb package            Use a 10 mm hex socket to remove two bolts  retaining the headlamp assembly            4    2  Slide the headlamp outboard until the pins are loose     3  Remove the headlamp assembly to access the bulbs     6 30           4  Rotate the bulb retainer counterclockwise to remove  the bulb assembly        5  Pull the tabs a
155. f you  keep your windows closed while using it     ta               Ventilation System   For mild outside temperatures when little heating or  cooling is needed  use VENT  on the electronic touch  system or manual operation of the Dual Automatic  Comftortemp system  to direct outside air through your  vehicle  Air will flow through the middle instrument  panel outlets     Your vehicle s flow through ventilation system supplies  outside air into the vehicle when it s moving  When the  vehicle is not moving  you can gel outside air to flow  through by selecting any air choice  except the rear  window defogger  and any fan speed    Adjust the direction of    airflow by moving the  louvered vents           If you have the rear passenger comfortemp option   you        adjust the direction of the airflow to the rear  seating area     Ventilation Tips        Keep the hood and front air inlet free of         snow or  any other obstruction such as leaves  The heater and  defroster will work better  reducing the chance of  forging your windows     e Keep the air path under the front seats clear of  objects  This helps air to circulate throughout  your vehicle     e When the engine idles for a long time  the exterior  temperature sensor may cause the system to blow  air that 15 too cool  Once the vehicle is moving again   the system will try to maintain the set temperature  inside your vehicle     e When you start your vehicle and the EXT display  flashes  Dual Automatic Comfortemp syst
156. ff all exterior lighting at night when you are  parked  tum off the headlamps and move the twilight  sentinel control all the way toward MIN  The exterior  lamps will turn back on automatically when you move  the transaxle out of PARK            As with any vehicle  you should tum on the regular  headlamp system when you need it   Cornering Lamps    The cornering lamps are designed to turn on when you  signal    turn  This will provide more lighting when  cornering at night        Twilight Sentinel The exterior lamps        be completely shut off while the  l vehicle is in PARK  F  by sliding the twilight sentinel  Twilight sentinel turns your control all the way toward MIN  and release  To turn the  X lamps on and off by sensing exterior lamps back on  slide the control all the way  TWILIGHT how dark it is outside  toward MIN aguin  and release  or  shift out of PARK   SENTINEL  win MAX Light Sensor                   Your twilight sentinel and  daytime running lamps   ITE PATRIA WE work with the lieht sensor  on top of the instrument  panel  Don t cover it up  If  you do  the sensor will read   dark  and the headlamps  will turn on        To operate it  leave the lamp switch off     If you move the control all the way to         your lamps  will remain on for three minutes after you turn off your  engine  As vou move the control toward MIN  the lamps  will turn off more quickly when you turn off your  engine  You can change this delay time from only a   few seconds to three 
157. g range  Push the dipstick all the way  back in when you re through     What Kind of Oil to Use    Oils recommended for vour vehicle can be identified by  looking for the    Starburst    symbol  This symbol  indicates that the eil has been certified by the American  Petroleum Institute  API   Do not use any oil which  does not carry this Starburst symbol     If you change your own oul   be sure you use oil that has  the Starburst symbol on the  front of the oil container  If  you have your oil changed     for you  be sure the oil put     into your engine is  American Petroleum  Institute certified Tor  gasoline engines     You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your  vehicle  as shown in the following chart          6 11    RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS  FOR BEST FUEL ECONDMY AND COLD STARTING  SELECT THE LOWEST    SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL F  R THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE      16  le  1  til   es        EEG GR    gd         NOT USE SAE 20W 50 DR AHY  OTHER GRADE      WOT RECOMMENDED       6 12    As shown in the chart  SAE  0W 30 is best for your  vehicle  However  you can use SAE SW 30 if it   s going  to be colder than 607     16  C  before your next oil  change  When it   s very cold  you should use SAE  5W 30  These numbers on an oil container show its  viscosity  or thickness  Do not use other viscosity oils   such as SAE 203 50      NOTICE     Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum  Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines     Starburs
158. han half a second  the vehicle will keep going  faster until you release the switch or apply the brake   So unless you want to go faster  don t hold the switch    t R A     2 39    Increasing 5peed While Using Cruise Control  There are two ways to go Lo a higher speed        Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed   Push the button at the end of the lever  then releuse  the button and the accelerator pedal  You ll now  cruise at the higher speed       Move the cruise switch from ON to        Hold it  there until you get up to the speed you want  and  then release the switch   To increase your speed in  very small amounts  move the switch to R A for  less than hall a second and then release it  Each  time you do this  your vehicle will go about   mph   1 6 km h  faster      The accelerate feature will only work after you have set  the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button     Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control   There are two ways to reduce your speed while using   cruise control    e Push inthe button at the end of the lever until you  teach the lower speed you want  then release it       Toslow down in very small amounts  push the SET  button for less than half a second  Each time you do  this  youll go 1 mph  1 6 Km h  slower     Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control    Use the accelerator pedal to increase vour speed  When  you take your foot off the pedal  your vehicle will slow  down to the cruise control speed you set earlier   
159. hat wouldn t be  covered hy vour warranty    Trving to start vour Buick by pushing or pulling  it won t work  and it could damage your vehicle        I  Check the other vehicle  It must have a 12 volt  battery with a negative ground system    NOTICE     If the other system isn t    12 volt system with a  negative ground  both vehicles can be damaged        Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  can reach  but be sure the vehicles aren t touching  each other  If they are  it could cause a ground  connection you don t want  You wouldn t be able  to start your Buick  and the bad grounding could  damage the electrical systems     To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling   set the parking hrake firmly on both vehicles  involved in the jump start procedure  Put your  automatic transaxle in PARK  P  before setting  the parking brake     Turn off the ignition on both vehicles  Unplug  unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  lighter  Turn off all lamps that aren t needed as well  as radios  This will avoid sparks and help save both  batteries  In addition  it could save your radio     NOTICE     If you leave your radio on  it could be badly  damaged  The repairs wouldn t be covered by  your warranty        4  Open the hoods and locate the batteries     An electric fan can start up even when the engine    is not running and can injure vou  Keep hands   clothing and tools away from any underhood  electric fan           un    Find the positive     and neg
160. he  defogger grid     6 49    Cleaning the Outside of the  Windshield and Wiper Blades    If the windshield 15 not clear after using the windshield  washer  or if the wiper blade chatters when running   wax  sap or other material may he on the blade   or windshield     Clean the outside of the windshield with GM  Windshield Cleaner  Bon Ami   Powder  non scratching  glass cleaning powder   GM Part No  1050011  The  windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse  it with water     Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades  und affect their performance  Clean the blade by wiping  vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield  washer solvent  Then rinse the blade with water     Check the wiper blades and clean them us necessary   replace blades  that look worn     Weatherstrips    silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  longer  seal better  and not stick or squeak  Apply  silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six  months  During very cold  damp weather more frequent  application may be required   See  Recommended  Fluids and Lubricants  in the Index      6 50    Cleaning the Outside of Your Buick    The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty  depth  of color  gloss retention and durability     Washing Your Vehicle    The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it  clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water     Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun   Don t use strong soap
161. he Index         It can he dangerous to get out of your vehicle if  the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll   Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is    running unless you have to  If you ve left the  engine running  the vehicle can move suddenly   You or others could be injured  To be sure your  vehicle won t move  even when vou re on fairly  level ground  always set vour parking brake and  move the shift lever to PARK               Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t  move  See    Shifting Into PARK        in the Index    If vou are parking on a hill and if you re pulling a  trailer  also see  Towing a Trailer    in the Index        Windows    Power Windows          Switches on the driver s armrest control each of the  windows while the ignition is on  In addition  each  passenger door has a switch for its own window        Express Down Window    The switch for the driver s window has an express down  feature  Pull the switch back all the way  release it and the  window will lower automatically  To stop the window  from lowering  pull the switch again  To partially open  the window  pull the switch back and quickly release it   To raise the window  hold the switch forward     Window Lock    Press the LOCK switch on the driver s armrest to  disable all passenger window switches  The driver s  window controls will still be operable  This is    useful  feature when you have children as passengers 
162. he correct rotation  pattem shown here     Don t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation     After the tires have been rotated  adjust the front and  rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire  Loading  Information label  Make certain that all wheel nuts are  properly tightened  See  Wheel Nut Torque  in   the Index        When It s Time for New Tires      One way to tell when it s  time for new tires 15 to  check the treadwear  indicatars  which will  appear when your tires have  only 1 16 inch  1 6 mm  ar  less of tread remaining     Rust or dirt on a wheel  or on the parts to which  it is fastened  can make wheel nuts become loose  after a time  The wheel could come off and cause  an accident  When you change a wheel  remove    any rust or dirt  rom places where the wheel  attaches to the vehicle  In an emergency  vou can  use a cloth or a paper towel to do this  but be  sure to use a scraper or wire brush later  if vou  need to  to get all the rust or dirt off   See     Changing    Flat Tire  in the Index         You need a new tire if any of the following statements   are true       You can see the indicators at three or more places  around the tire        You        see cord or fabric showing through the  tire   s rubber       The tread or sidewall is cracked  cut or snagged deep  enough to show cord or fabric       The tire has a bump  bulge or split   The tire has    puncture  cut or other damage that  can t be repaired well because of the size or loca
163. he highest gear possible     Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane  If you don t shift down  your brakes could get so roads in hills or mountains  Don t swing wide or cut  hot that they wouldn t work well  You would then across the center of the road  Drive at speeds that let  have poor braking or even none going down    hill  you stay in your owr lane   F                 SE        n  4     You could crash  Shift down to let SUE           As vou go over the top of a hill  be alert  There could be  assist your brakes on    steep downhill slope  something in your lane  like    stalled car or an accident        8    You may see highway signs on mountains that wam of  special problems  Examples are long grades  passing or  no passing zones     falling rocks area or winding  roads  Be alert to these and take appropriate action     4 25       Winter Driving       Include      ice scraper  a small brush or broom     supply  of windshield washer fluid  a rag  some winter outer  Here are some tips for winter driving  clothing  a small shovel  a flashlight  a red cloth and a    M    couple of reflective warning triangles  And  if vou will     Have your Buick in good shape for winter  P           gt        be driving under severe conditions  include a small bag        You may want to put winter emergency supplies in of sand  a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags  your trunk  lo help provide traction  Be sure you properly secure    these items in your vehicle     4 26
164. hem off   1f the parking lamps  were turned on with the PARK switch  they must be  turned off with that switch      2 41    Lamps On Reminder    II vou leave the manual headlamp or parking lump  switch on  remove the key from the ignition and open  the driver s door  you will hear    continuous warning  chime  The chime will turn off when the lamps are  turned aff     Daytime Running Lamps    Daytime Running Lamps  DRL  can make it easier for  others to see the front of your vehicle during the day   DRL can be helpful in many different driving  conditions  but they can be especially helpful in the  short periods alter dawn and before sunset    A light sensor on top af the instrument panel monitors  the exterior light level for the operation of DRL and  twilight sentinel  so be sure it isn t covered    The DRL system will make your high beam headlamps  turn on at reduced brightness in daylight when    e The ignition is on    e The headlump switch is off and    e The transaxle is not in PARK          2 42    When the DRL are on  only your high beam headlamps  will be on  The parking lamps  taillamps  sidemarker  and other lamps won t he on  Your instrument panel  lights won t be on either     When it is dark enough outside  your low beam  headlamps will come on  The other lamps that turn on  with your headlamps will also turn on  When it is bright  enough outside  the regular lamps will go off  and your  high beam headlamps change to the reduced brightness  of DRL     To turn o
165. herd 1d 2 44                        2 15  Theft Deterrent Alarm System 2 16  Thett Deterrent Feature   M re ra a         THEBETLUCN      a    A aAA 3 3   Es       AEN ER Y TOT T Terao nar aa                       6 23  Third Gear  Automatic Transaxle   iare                   Tilt Steering Wheel opaca             77  Time Girt Feature  5 3 525 ses aei 2 44       Ja                   nn er      OE EO 214                                         83 5 twee Ew 1 9 4  h 4    De    DIS                    ERR EX Pala ii 4 3   Tire Loading Information Label                     4 31  THES                                  6 38  Alignment and                                     ous 6744  Buying Mew                        IA yo Te MD MERE 6 42  CE  Corgi er RR UOCE E Ec a RUEDA h 4n  Changing    Flat               iaa eM ira Eun daB IPIE  Cle ee arya bs bee                  6 32                  ers ew vom n rw rw e        E a                 lillv 4er ruens rur P RR es 2  6 39  Inflation Check   CPTUHE MESS     7 39  Inspection and Risa  ecce ce er eI CA 6 40  LOSSE cess rarer           pee      ELIT M Es  Pel 1 ase cce CIT 6 39  Temperature                    ERE 6 44                       Ee 8 43                         Vise leac                     6 43  Uniform Quality Grading ROOM qo 2  6 43  esr                                                    6 41  Wheel Replacement                                    044  When It s Time for New               6 4   IIE                 wie des     
166. hicle Limited Warranty   interim transportation may be available under the  Courtesy Transportation program  Please consult your  dealer for details  The Courtesy Transportation program  is available only in the United States and Canada     In Canada  please consult your GM dealer for  information on Courtesy Transportation        GM Participation in an Alternative  Dispute Resolution Program    Thus program is available in all 50 states and the   District of Columbia  Canadian owners refer to your  Warranty and Owner Assistance Information hooklet for  information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration  Plan  CAMVAP   General Motors reserves the right to  change eligibility limitations and or to discontinue its  participation in this program     Both Buick and your Buick dealer are committed  ta making sure you are completely satisfied with  your new vehicle  Our experience has shown that   IF a situation arises where you feel your concern  has not been adequately addressed  the Customer  Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this  section is very successful     There may be instances where an impartial third party  can assist in arriving at a solutron to a disuereement  regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New  Vehicle Limited Warranty  To assist in resolving these  disagreements  Buick voluntarily participates in BBB  AUTO LINE        BBB AUTO LINE is an out of court program  administered by the Better Business Bureau system to  settle automotive dis
167. hing to the fuel  In addition  eusolines containing  oxygenates  such as ethers and ethanol  and  reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to  help clean the air  General Motors recommends that you  use these gasolines if they comply with the  specifications described earlier     NOTICE     Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that  contains methanol  Don t use it  It can corrode  metal parts in your fuel system and also damage  plastic and rubber parts  That damage wouldn t  he covered under your warranty   Fuels in Foreign Countries  If you plan on driving in another country outside the  United States or Canada  the proper fuel may be hard to  find  Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not  recommended in the previous text on fuel  Costly repairs  caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered       your warranty   To check on fuel availability  ask an auto club  or  contact a major oil company that does business in the  country where you ll be driving   You can also write us at the following address Tor  advice  Just tell us where you re going and give your  Vehicle Identification Number  VIN     General Motors International Product Center   1906 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario LIH 8P7          6 4      Filling Your Tank    Gasoline vapor is highly flammable  It burns    violently  and that can cause very bad injuries   Don t smoke if vou re near gasoline or refueling  vour vehicle  Keep sparks  flames and smoking  materials away from gasoline 
168. however  secure a forward facing child  restraint in the right front seat  Before you secure  a forward facing child restraint  always move the  front passenger seat as far back as it will go  Or   secure the child restraint in the rear seat        A child in a child restraint in the center front seat  can      badly injured by the            front passenger  air bag if it inflates  Never secure a child restraint    in the center front seat  It s always better to  secure a child restraint in the rear seat  You may   however  secure a forward facing child restraint  in the right front passenger seat  but only with  the seat moved all the way back     Wherever vou install it  be sure to secure the child  restraint properly     Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move  around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in  the vehicle  Be sure to properly secure any child  restraint in your vehicle    even when no child is in it        Top Strap       If your child restraint has    top strap  it should be  anchored  If you need to have an anchor installed  you  can ask your Buick dealer to put it in for you  If you  want to install an anchor yourself  your dealer can tell  you how to do it     Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top  strap  and that the strap be anchored     If your child restraint has a tap strap  your dealer can  obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation  instructions specifically designed for this vehicle  The  deale
169. hows that the driving skills of  many people are impaired at a BAC approaching   0 05 percent  and that the effects are worse at night  All  drivers are impaired at BAC levels above  0 05 percent   Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision  increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of   0 05 percent or above  A driver with a BAC level of  0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a  collision  Ata BAC level of 0 10 percent  the chance of  this driver having a collision is 12 times greater  at a  level of 0 15 percent  the chance is 25 times greater     The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol  in one drink  N   amount of coffee or number of cald  showers will speed that up   I ll be careful  isn t the  right answer  What if there s an emergency     need to  take sudden action  as when a child darts into the street      persan with even a moderate        might not be able  to react quickly enough to avoid the collision     There s something else about drinking and driving that  many people don t know  Medical research shows that  alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries  worse  especially injuries to the brain  spinal cord or  heart  This means that when anyone who has been  drinking    driver or passenger     is in a crash  that  person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled  is higher than if the person had not been drinking        Drinking and then driving is very dangerous   Your reflexes  perceptions  atte
170. ht wheels have  dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while  you re driving     OFF ROAD RECOVERY 22              fe LEFT APPROX  QUARTER TURN    s               a                    If the level of the shoulder 15 only slightly below the  pavement  recovery should be fairly easy  Ease off the  accelerator and then  if there is nothing in the way  steer so  that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement  You  can tum the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the  right front tire contacts the pavement edge  Then tum your  steering wheel to go straight down the roadway        Passing    The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on     two lane highway waits for just the right moment   accelerates  moves around the vehicle ahead  then goes  back into the right lane again  A simple maneuver     Not necessarily  Passing another vehicle on a two lane  highway is a potentially dangerous move  since the  passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming  traffic for several seconds  A miscalculation  an error in  judgment  or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can  suddenly put the passing driver face to lace with the  worst of all traffic accidents    the head on collision        So here are some tips for passing            Drive ahead     Look down the road  to the sides and to  crossroads for situations that might affect your passing  pattems     you have any doubt whatsoever about  making a successful pass  wait for a better time        Watch f
171. ified government test surfaces of asphalt and  concrete  A tire marked C may have poor   traction performance    Warning  The traction grade assigned to this tire is based  on braking  straightahead  traction tests and does not  include cornering  turning  traction     6 43    Temperature       B  C    The temperature grades            the highest   B  and      representing the tire s resistance to the generation of  heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  test wheel  Sustained high temperature can cause the  material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life  and  excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure   The grade    corresponds to a level of performance  which all passenger car tires must meet under the  Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No  109  Grades  B and A represent higher levels of performance on the  laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law     Warning  The temperature grade for this tire is  established for a tire that 1s properly inflated and not  overloaded  Excessive speed  underinllation  or  excessive loading  either separately or in combination   can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure     Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance    The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced  carefully at the factory to sive you the longest tire life  and best overall performance     6 44    Scheduled wheel alignment und wheel balancing are not  needed  H
172. in good working condition  but also helps the  environment  All recommended maintenance procedures  are important  Improper vehicle maintenance can even  affect the quality of the air we breathe  Improper fluid  levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level  of emissions from your vehicle  To help protect our       environment  and to keep your vehicle in good  condition  please maintain your vehicle properly     How This Section is Organized   The remainder of this section is divided into five parts    Part A  Scheduled Maintenance Services  shows  what to have done and how often  Some of these  services can be complex  so unless you are technically  qualified and have the necessary equipment  you should  let your dealer s service department or another qualified  service center do these jobs     Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can  be dangerous  In trying to do some jobs  vou can    he seriously injured  Do your own maintenance  work only if you have the required know how  and the proper tools and equipment for the job   If you have any doubt  have a qualified  technician do the work     If you are skilled enough to do some work on your  vehicle  you will probably want to get the service  information GM publishes  See    Service and Owner  Publications    in the Index            Part B  Owner Checks and Services  tells vou what  should be checked and when  It also explains what you  can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition        Part C 
173. ing   Rough ride  The Tire Loading Information label  which is on the Needless damage from road hazards   rear edge of the driver s door  shows the correct  inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold    Cold  means your vehicle has been sitting for at least  three hours or driven no more than 1 mile  1 6 km         Inflation    Tire Pressure          6 39    When to Check  Check your tires once a month or more     Don t forget your compact spare tire  It should be at  60 psi  420 kPa      How to Check    Use    good quality pocket type gage to check tire  pressure  You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated  simply by looking at them  Radial tires may look  properly inflated even when they re underinflated     Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems   They help prevent leaks hy keeping out dirt and moisture     Tire Inspection and Rotation    Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles   10 000 to 13 000 km   Any time you notice unusual  wear  rotate your tires as soon as possible and check  wheel alignment  Also check for damaged tires or  wheels  See    When It s Time for New Tires  and     Wheel Replacement  later in this section for   more information    The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more  uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle         first  rotation is the most important  See  Scheduled    6 40       Maintenance Services  in the Index for scheduled  rotation intervals        When rotating your tires  always use t
174. int job causes this  Buick  will repair  at no charge to the owner  the surfaces of  new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  12 months or 12 00 miles  20 000 km  of purchase   whichever occurs first        Appearance Care Materials Chart    SIZE    23 in     25 in        PART NUMBER    994954           DESCRIPTION   USAGE     Polishing Cloth     Wax Treated Exterior Polish    1050004   Shines vehicle without scratching    o 1050172 16        0 473 L         and Road Oil Remover Also removes old waxes and polishes    1050172 16 oz   0 473 L  Chrome Cleaner and Polish    10501 74 l6 oz   0 473 Li White Sidewall Tire Cleaner    gal   3 785 L  Magic Mirror Cleaner Polish                            Removes rust and corrosion            Removes soil and black marks    a a          1050427 23 oz   0 680 L  Glass Cleaner    1052870 16 oz   0 4731  Wash and Wax Concentrate Exterior wash    8 oz   0 237 L  Armor         Protector   Protects vinyl  leather and rubber    1052918    1052925   16 oz   0 473 L  Multi Purpose Powdered Cleaner Cleans vinyl  cloth  tires and mats    1052979 16 oz   0 4473 L  Wheel Cleaner spray on wheel cleaner    1052930  amp  oz   0 237 L  Capture Dry Spot Remover Attracts and absorbs soils   2345002   I6 oz   0 473 1   Armor AIL  Cleaner    220  2245725 12 oz   0 354 L      Silicone Tire Shine    12377964 16 oz   0 473 L  Cleaning Wax     2377066 16 az   0 473 L     See your General Motors Parts Department for these products   See    Fluids a
175. ion Control Service       Replace air cleaner filter   An Emission Control Service         SERVICED BY           ACTUAL MILEAGE             Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule    63 000 Miles  105 000 km        Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage _  Change engine oil and filter  or every  or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any 3 months  whichever occurs first    damage  Replace parts as needed  An Emission Control Service   See footnote        An Emission Control Service   See footnotet      L  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote      Also see footnote         ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY    ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 19           66 000 Miles  110 000       69 000 Miles  115 000 km      _  Change engine oil and filter  or every   L  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote        L  Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote        L  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote        ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY      ATE   ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY           7 20         72 000 Miles 7 120 000 km  75 000 Miles  125 000 km     1 Change engine oil and filte
176. ir to low  through your Buick when the vehicle is moving even  with the system in the OFF mode     VENT  The VENT button allows outside air to flow  through your Buick without the air conditioning  compressor working  Selecting VENT and the AUTO  button at the same time allows the system to control  automatically without the use of the air conditioning  compressor or the use of the RECIRC mode  To turn off  the VENT selection  push the VENT button again     RECIRC  When RECIRC is selected  the system will  limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle   This is helpful when you are trying to cool the interior    of the vehicle quickly or limit the amount of outside  air entering your vehicle  RECIRC and AUTO may  be selected at the same time  The svstem will remain  in RECIRC until the ignition is turned off  then the  system will return back to the previously selected  mode  Deselecting the RECIRC button will also turn  aff the RECIRC function  RECIRC can be selected     all manual airflow modes except FRONT defrost  and VENT     FRONT  This s  lection is used to defrost the windshield  by directing the airflow toward the windshield     If FRONT is selected while in the AUTO mode  the  fan speed and the air temperature from the front  defroster will vary   fa manual fan speed setting is  selected  the fan speed will remain at that selection  until another fan speed selection is made or the AUTO  mode is selected  To tum off FRONT  press the AUTO  or AIR FLOW button  
177. ire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  ipReplace air cleaner filter  pattern and additional information     An Emission Control Service   See footnote      Also see footnote              DATE   ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY     7 36       Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule       97 500 Miles  162 500 km    100 000 Miles  166 000 km   L  Change engine oil and filter  or every    Inspect spark plug wires   12 months  whichever occurs first        Emission Control Service   An Emission Control Service   See footnote     m Replace spark plugs   _  Lubricate chassis components  or every An Emission Control Service   12 months  whichever occurs first   C Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter  E  See footnote 3   if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or      Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and more of these conditions   Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation   In heavy city traffic where the outside  pattern and additional information  temperature regularly reaches 90  F   See footnote        32  C  or higher                        Continued   7 37       Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule       100 000 Miles  166 000 km   Continued  150 000 Miles  240 000 km        n hilly or mountainous terrain       Drain  flush and refill cooling system      When doing frequent trailer towing   or every 60 months since last service     whichever occurs first   See  Engine  Coolant  in the Index for what to use   Inspect hoses  Clean radiator  cond
178. it with you  Always do this  Your  steering wheel will be locked  and so will your ignition    and transaxle  And remember to lock the doors     Parking at Night    Park in a lighted spot  close all windows and lock your  vehicle  Remember to keep vour valuables out of sight     Put them in a storage area  or take them with you        Parking Lots  If vou park in a lot where someone will be watching  your vehicle  it   s best to lock it up and take your keys   But what if you have to leave your ignition key  What if  you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle      Put your valuables in    storage area  like your trunk  ar glove box      Lock the glove box   Turn off the TRUNK RELEASE lockout in the  glove box       Lock all the doors except the driver s      Then take the door key and remote keyless entry  transmitter with you     2 15    Universal Theft Deterrent   If Equipped     If your Buick has this  option  it has     theft deterrent alarm  system  With this system   the SECURITY light will  flash as you open the door   if your ignition 15 off      SECURITY       This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent   system when leaving vour vehicle    Activating the system    I  Open the door    2  Lock the door with the power door lock switch while  the door is open  or with the Remote Keyless Entry    transmitter  The SECURITY light should tum on and  stay on     3  Close all doors  The SECURITY light should go olf  after about 30 seconds  The alarm is no
179. itch  The automatic door  locks will remain in the most recent mode selected        Delayed Locking  If Equipped     This feature lets the driver delay the actual locking of  the vehicle  When the power door lock switch is pressed  with the key removed from the ignition  and the driver s  door open  a chime will sound three times to signal that  delayed locking is active  When all doors have been  closed  the doors will lock automatically after five  seconds  If any door is opened before this  the  five second timer will reset itself once all the doors  have been closed again     Pressing the door lock switch twice within two seconds  will override this feature   Personal Choice Programming    The delayed locking feature        be turned on or off for  each remote transmitter  Vehicles are delivered with each  remote transmitter defaulted with delayed locking off        To tum the feature on        Press and hold the driver s power door lock switch  throughout this procedure  All the doors will lock     2  Press the UNLOCK button on the remote transrmutter   The lock delay 15 still off and all doors will remain locked     3  Press the UNLOCK button on the remote transmitter  again  Lock delay is now active and all doors will unlock     4  Release the power door lock switch   To turn this feature off  repeat the previous procedure     If your vehicle      not equipped with Remote Keyless  Entry  the delaved locking feature ean he turned on or  aff hy using the following proced
180. its agree  with your code     Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree  with your code     Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the  code matches the secret code you have written down  The display will show REP to let you know that you  need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your  secrel code     Press AM FM and this time the display will show  SEC to let you know that your radio is secure     Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a  Power Loss    Enter your secret code as follows  pause no more than  15 seconds between steps     1  LOC appears when the ignition is on   2  Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display     3  Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree  with your code     4  Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree  with your code     5  Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the    code matches the secret code you have written down     The display will show SEC  indicating the radio is  now operable and secure     If you enter the wrong code eight times  INOP will  appear on the display  You will have te wait an hour  with the ignition on before you can try again  When  you try ugain  you will only have three more chances   eight tries per chance  to enter the correct code before  INOP appears     If you lose or forget your code  contact your dealer     3 32    Disubling the Theft  Deterrent Feature    Enter your secret code us follows  pause no more than   15 seconds between steps    1  Turn the ignition to ACCES
181. ity just as you would for a  cross country trip         Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most  lurge cities  You ll save time and energy   See the  next part   Freeway Driving         Treat    green light as a warning signal  A traffic light is  there because the comer is busy enough to need it   When a light turns green  and just before you start 10  move  check both ways for vehicles that have not  cleared the intersection or may be running the red light        One of the biggest problems with city streets 1s the  amount of traffic on them  You ll want to watch out for  what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to  traffic signals     Freeway Driving       Mile for mile  freeways  also called thruways  parkways     expressways  turnpikes or superhighways  are the safest  of all roads  But they have their own special rules     4 22    The most important advice on freeway driving is  Keep  up with traffic and keep to the right  Drive at the same  speed most of the other drivers are driving  Too fast or  too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow  Treat the  left lane on a freeway as a passing lane     At the entrance  there ts usually    ramp that leads to the  freeway  If you have a clear view of the freeway as you  drive along the entrance ramp  you should begin t    check traffic  Try to determine where you expect to  blend with the flow  Try to merge into the gap at close to  the prevailing speed  Switch on your turn signal  check  your mirrors 
182. just a seal  on wheels     Put someone on it             Jd       Get it up to speed  Then stop the vehicle  The rider  doesn t stop        The person keeps going until stopped by something     Ina real vehicle  it could be the windshield             or the instrument panel           or the safety belts     With safety belts  you slow down as the vehicle does   You get more time to stop  You stop over more distance   and your strongest bones take the forces  That s why  safety belts make such good sense     1 9    Here Are Questions Many People Ask  About Safety Belts    and the Answers    Q  Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an  accident if l m wearing a safety belt         You could be    whether you re weuring    safety  belt or not  But you can unbuckle a safety belt   even if you re upside down  And vour chance of  being conscious during and after      accident  so  you cam unbuckle and get out  is much greater if  you are belted     0  If my vehicle has air bags  why should I have to  wear safetv belts         Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in  most of them in the future  But they are  supplemental systems only  so they work with  safety belts    not instead of them  Every air bag  system ever offered for sale has required the use of  safety belts  Even if you re in a vehicle that has air  bags  you still have to huckle up to get the most  protection  That s true not only in frontal collisions   but especially in side and other collisions     1 10
183. kle the belt  Make sure the release button is  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  safety belt quickly if vou ever had to        Securing a Child Restraint      the Right You ll be using the lap shoulder belt  See the earlier part   Front Seat Position about the tap strap if the child restraint has one    1  Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air  bag  always move the seat as far back as it will go  before securing a forward facing child restraint   See     Seats         the Index      2  Put the restraint on the seat  Follow the mstructions  for the child restraint        3  Secure the child in the child restraint as the  Instr  cltons say   Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag  Never      i      i 4  Pick up the latch plate  and run the lap and shoulder  put a rear facing child restraint in this seat  Here s why            SUR 5    portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or  around the restraint  The child restraint instructions  will show vou how     li the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or    z  ck  pul it behind the child restraint     A child in a rear facing child restraint can be HEP        ena MON           seriously injured if the right front passenger s air    bag inflates  This is because the back of a  rear facing child restraint would be very close to  the inflating air bag  Always secure a rear facing  child restraint in the rear seat                     5  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release butt
184. l  To set the  parking brake  hold the     regular hrake pedal down    with your right foot  Push       down the parking brake     pedal with your left foot     TD    RELEAS           If the ignition is on  the brake system warning light will          on and    single chime will be heard  The parking  brake uses the brakes on the rear wheels     To release the parking brake  hold the regular brake  pedal down and push the parking brake pedal with your    left foot  This will unlock the pedal  When you lift your  left foot  the park bruke pedal will follow it to the  released position     If you try to drive approximately 40 feet  12 2 m  with  the parking brake on  the brake light stays on and a  chime sounds until you release the parking brake     NOTICE     Driving with the parking brake on can cause  vour rear brakes to overheat  You may have to  replace them  and vou could also damage other  parts of your vehicle        If you ure towing a trailer and are parking on any hill   see  Towing a Trailer  in the Index  That section shows  what ta do first to keep the trailer from moving        Shifting Into PARK  P  2  Move the shift lever into PARK       like this     It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if    the shift lever is not fully in PARK       with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll     If you have left the engine running  the vehicle  can move suddenly  You or others could be  injured  To be sure your vehicle won t move  even  when you re 
185. l become so  heavy vou can t hold it  For example  in a crash  CAUTION   Continued     at only 25 mph  40 km h      12 Ib   5 5 kg  baby  will suddenly become a 240 Ib   110 kg  force on  your arms  The baby would be almost impossible  to hold     Secure the baby in an infant restraint        Child Restraints    Be sure the child restraint is designed ta be used in a  vehicle  IF it is  1t will have a label saying that it meets  Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards     Then follow the instructions for the restraint  You may  find these instructions on the restraint itself or in     booklet  or both  These restraints use the belt svstem in  your vehicle  but the child also has to be secured within    the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury     The instructions that come with the infant or child  restraint will show you how to do that     Where to Put the Restraint    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat  We at  General Motors therefore recommend that you put your  child restraint in the rear seat  Never put a rear facing  child restraint in the front passenger seal  Here s why        child in a rear facing child restraint        be  seriously injured if the right front passenger s air  bag inflates  This is because the back of a  rear facing child restraint would be very close to    the inflating air         Always secure a rear facing  child restraint in the rear seat     You may  
186. l cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return     Monday Friday 8 00 AM     8 00      EST   FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5327    PUBLICATION FORM    information within 30 days of delivery  On returns  a re stocking tee may be applied  against the original order    ITEM DESCRIPTION VEHICLE MODEL          PRICE   TOTAL    PRICE                                                 Gar  amp  Light Truck  Transmission Lint Aapair    Owner s Manual In Fortfalia        pw  Tees                             Owners Manual Without Portolio    soo       Sc    add 5855 sales tay  only     do no  send cash      x MasterCard Canadian Postage  Psi  See Note Below     E Discover   7  umber  1    Expiration  1   I  Check here     your billing addnss  s dierent tram vaur ahippin  Date mo yr  Peng    Sddress shown               Dealer and Companies pleaue provide diiler nr corpany name and also the    name of the person to whose atlentian ihe          should me serit  Mail completed ander iprm                HELM  INCORPORATED    P C  Box 07130 s Detroit  MI 48207    For purchases outside USA  phrase          do thie abo  addrass far quotation                  Order payable to  Helm  Inc   USA funds            ictus TOMER S             amp TTEHTICIN             BTREET ADDRESS HO PO                  Hrs       cm  ETATE       eon       adzms    u    DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO          Cus TOME SIGNATLRE        AREA CODE  BULOADI7                          subject jo changa witout notice and wi
187. l you  about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore  the warning     These mean there is something that could hurt  you or other people        In the caution area  we tell you what the hazard 15  Then  we tell vou what to do to help avoid or reduce the  hazard  Please read these cautions  If you don t  you or  others could be hurt     You will also find a circle  with a Slash through it in  this hook  This safety  symbol means  Don t     Don t do this   or  Don t  let this happen            viii      Vehicle Damage Warnings    Also  1n this book you will find these notices     These mean there is something that could  damage vour vehicle           In the notice area  we tell you about something that can  damage your vehicle  Many times  this damage would  not be covered by your warranty  and it could be  costly  But the notice will tell you what to do to help  avoid the damage     When you read other manuals  you might see  CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different   colors or in different words    You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle  They use  the same words  CAUTION or NOTICE     Vehicle Symbols  These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle     Fore sampile   These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here        some  these symbols        important have to do witht ire on some of        used on other symbols  are used on      for you and        lamps        controls              ard yen muy see   original battery  your passeng
188. least twice a year  for instance  each  spring and fall   You should let your GM dealer s  service department or other qualified service center do  these jobs  Make sure any necessarv repairs are  completed at once     Proper procedures to perform these services may he    Found in a GM service manual  See  Service and Owner    Publications  in the Index     Steering  Suspension and Front Drive Axle  Boot and Seal Inspection    Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering  system for damaged  loose or missing parts  signs of  wear or lack of lubrication  Inspect the power steering  lines and hoses for proper hook up  binding  leaks   cracks  chafing  etc  Clean and then inspect the drive  axle boot seals for damage  tears or leakage  Replace  seals if necessary     Exhaust System Inspection    Inspect the complete exhaust system  Inspect the body  near the exhaust system  Look for broken  damaged   missing or out of position parts as well as open seams   holes  loose connections or other conditions which could  cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let  exhaust fumes into the vehicle  See  Engine Exhaust  in  the Index     Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection    Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are  cracked  swollen or deteriorated  Inspect all pipes   fittings and clamps  replace as needed     Throttle Linkage Inspection    Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding   and for damage or missing parts  Replace parts as  needed  Repla
189. ler Children and Babies                      1 33  Use During Pregnancy 5    nnn n 1 18  Why They                                         1 6  Safety Chaim                           4 37  Safety Defects  Reporting                           8 8  Safety Warnings and Symbols                              Scheduled Maintenance Services                      7 4  Seatback  Reclining Front                          1 4    9 8 I    Seats  Manus Front                   2  PW        doro retener Aure Tav e E dira       Restraint Systems                      ees         1 1  Sea COME          2  Securing a Child Restraint        2         2      1 37  Second Gear  Automatic Transaxle 2 26  Security Feedback joios epora ese RE EAT EA 2 1  Personal Choice Programming                 oat  SHREW CH        real a A a a alfa a         xa        2 17                   ee nt        6 2  Bulletins  Ordering             ea           4 10             Ordenng           sical eles 8        Parts Identification Label   6 54  Publications  Ordering 2                     8 9  Work  Doing Your Own        6 2  Service and Appearance Care  2502                        6 1  Service and Owner Publications          8 10  Service Publipations   2 1    ll ilu dana 8 10  Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Buick                 24  Sheet Metal Damage                              6 52  Shifting  Automatic Transaxle         oca 2 23  Inte PARR CEN LL crassa nina ud                 2 28                                 co
190. ler or qualified service center diagnosis and  service may be required        2 66        If the Light Is Flashing   The following may prevent more serious damage        your vehicle       Reducing vehicle speed       Avoiding hard accelerations       Avoiding steep uphill grades        f you are towing a trailer  reduce the amount of  cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible    If the light stops flashing and remains on steady  see    If   the Light Is On Steady    following    If the light continues ro flash  when it is safe to do so    stop the vehicle  Find a safe place to park your vehicle    Turn the key off  wait at least 10 seconds and restart the   engine  If the light remains on steady  see  If the Light   Is On Steady  following  If the light is still flashing    follow the previous steps  and drive the vehicle to your   dealer or qualified service center for service    If the Light Is On 5teadv    You may be able to correct the emissron system  malfunction by considering the following     Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle     If so  reinstall the fuel cap  making sure to fully install  the cap  The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel           has been left off or improperly installed  A loose or  missing fuel cap will allow fuel te evaporate into the  atmosphere     few driving trips with the cap properly  installed should turn the light off     Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water     If       your electrical system may be wet 
191. level  nght away     CHECK    OIL LEVEL       For more information  see  Check Oil Level Light  in the  Index  You should check your engine oil level regularly   this is an added reminder  It   s a good idea to check your  engine oil every time you get fuel  In order to get an  accurate reading  the oil must be warm and the vehicle  must be on level ground     6 10       The engine oil dipstick 18  right behind the engine fans  and in front of the engine  oil fill cap  The top of the  dipstick is    round    yellow loop     Turn off the engine and give the oil    few minutes to  drain back into the oil pan  If vou don t  the oil dipstick  might not show the actual level     Checking Engine Gil    Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or  cloth  then push it back in all the way  Remove it again   keeping the tip down  and check the level           When to Add Oil    If the   il is at or below the ADD mark  then you ll need to  add at least one quart of oil  But you must use the right  kind  This part explains what kind of oi to use  For  erankcase capacity  see  Capacities and Specifications  in  the Index     NOTICE     Don t add too much oil  If your engine has so    much oil that the oil level gets above the  cross hatched area that shows the proper  operating range  your engine could he damaged           The engine oil fill cap is behind the engine oil dipstick  and engine fans     Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in  the proper operatin
192. listening pleasure  You will get  the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself  with it first  Find out what your Delco system        do  and how to operate all its controls  to be sure vou re  getting the most out of the advanced engineering that  went into it     Setting the Clock    Press and hold HRS until the correct hour appears   Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears   You may set the clock with the ignition off if vou  press RECALL  first and follow the sume procedure  described above     3 12    AM FM Stereo       Plaving the Radio  VOLUME  This knob turns the system on and off and  controls the volume  To increase volume and tum the    radio on  turn the knob clockwise  Turn it  counterclockwise to decrease volume        RECALL  Press the upper knob briefly to recall the  station being played or to display the clock  To change    what is normally shown on the display  station or time      press the knob until you see the display you want  then  hold the knob until the display flashes  If you press the  knob when the ignition is off  the clock will show for a  few seconds     Finding a Station               Press the AM FM button to switch between  AM         and     2  The display shows your selection     TUNE  Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations     SEEK  Press the right or left arrow to go to the next  higher or lower station and stay there  The sound will  mute while seeking     SCAN  Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds   
193. ll  be just for you  and just for the seat in your vehicle that  you choose  Don t let someone else use it  and use it  only for the seat it is made to fit  To wear it  just attach it  to the regular safety belt     Checking Your Restraint Systems    Now and then  make sure the safety belt reminder light  and all your belts  buckles  latch plates  retractors and  anchorages are working properly  Look for any other  loose or damaged safety belt system parts     vou see  anything that might keep a safety belt system from  doing its job  have it repaired    Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a  crash  They        rip apart under impact forces  Tf a belt is  torn or frayed  get a new one right away    Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers  und  have them repaired or replaced   The air bag system  does not need regular maintenance       1 46    Replacing Restraint System Parts  After a Crash    If you ve had a crash  do you need new belts     After a very minor collision  nothing may be necessary   But if the belts were stretched  as they would be if wom  during    more severe crash  then you need new belts     IF belts are cut or damaged  replace them  Collision  damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt  or seat parts repaired or replaced  New parts and repairs  may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at  the time of the collision     If your seat adjuster won t work after a crash  the special  part of the salety belt that goe
194. m loud noise is almost undetectable  until it is too late  Your hearing can adapt to higher  volumes of sound  Sound that seems normal can be  loud and harmful to your hearing  Take precautions by  adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe  sound level before your hearing adapts to it     To help avotd hearing loss or damage      Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting        Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably  and clearly     NOTICE     Before you add any sound equipment to  your vehicle    like a tape player  CB radio   mobile telephone or two way radio    be sure  you can add what you want  If you can  it   s  very important to do it properly  Added sound  equipment may interfere with the operation   of vour vehicle s engine  Delco radio or   other systems  and even damage them  Your  vehicle s systems may interfere with the  operation of sound equipment that has been  added improperly    So  before adding sound equipment  check with  vour dealer and be sure to check Federal rules  covering mobile radio and telephone units                       Care of Your Cassette Tape Player    A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause  reduced sound quality  ruined cassettes or a damaged  mechanism  Cassette tapes should he stored in their  cases away from contaminants  direct sunlight and  extreme heat  If they aren t  they may not operate  properly or may cause failure of the tape player     Your tape player should be cleaned regularly af
195. m the hitch  Instructions  about safety chains may be provided by the hitch  manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer  Follow the  manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety  chains and do not attach them to the bumper  Always  leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig   And  never allow safety chains to drag on the ground     Trailer Brakes    Does your trailer have its own brakes  Be sure to read and  follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be  able to install  adjust and maintam them properly    Because you have anti lock brakes  do not try to tap into  your vehicle s brake system  If you do  both brake  systems won t work well  or at all        Driving with a Trailer    Towing a trailer requires    certain amount of experience   Before setting out for the open road  you ll want to get  to know your rig  Acquaint yourself with the feel of  handling and braking with the added weight of the  trailer  And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are  driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as  responsive as your vehicle is by itself     Before you start  check the trailer hitch and platform   and attachments   salety chains  electrical connector   lumps  tires and mirror adjustment  If the trailer has  electric brakes  start your vehicle and trailer moving and  then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure  the brakes are working  This lets you check your  electrical connection at the same time     During your trip
196. minutes           Interior Lamps    Instrument Panel Intensity  Brightness  Control    The instrument panel  intensity can be adjusted by  moving this lever between  LO and HI  The instrument  panel lights will be on only  when the headlamps are        The interior courtesy lamps  can be turned on      sliding  the lever all the way to   the right        Time Out Feature  If Equipped     On vehicles equipped with the Remote Keyless Entry  system  the interior lamps will automatically shut off  after a  0 minute period if a door is left ajar or if the  interior courtesy lamp switch has been left in the INT   on  position  This Feature is designed to help eliminate  battery wear down     2 44    Courtesy Lamps    When any door is opened  several lamps go       They  make it easy Tor you to enter and leave the vehicle  You  can also turn these lamps on by sliding the PANEL  LIGHTS switch to INT  Interior      Delayed Entry Lighting   When you open the door  the interior lamps will turn on   When you close the door with the ignition off  the  interior lamps will stay on for 25 seconds or until the  ignition is turned to an on position  Note that locking the  doors will override the delayed entry lighting feature  and the lamps will turn off right away     Theater Dimming   This feature allows for a three to five second Fade out of  the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off   Delayed Exit Lighting    With this feature  the interior lamps will turn on and stay  on for up to 
197. months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service   See footnote 7    See footnote s          Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information    See footnote               Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule       45 000 Miles  75 000 km  50 000 Miles  83 000 km        Change engine oil and filter  or every     Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter  12 months  whichever occurs first   if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or  An Emission Control Service   See footnote     more of these conditions    C  Lubricate chassis components  or every      n heavy city traffic where the outside  12 months  whichever occurs first   temperature regularly reaches 90  F   See footnote      32  C  or higher       Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and     In hilly or mountainous terrain     Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation             and additional information      Uses such as found in taxi  police or   See footnote      Also see footnote      PRE Ei        When doing frequent trailer towing     If vou do nor use your vehicle under any of these  conditions  the fluid and filter do not require changing     SERVICED BY  ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY              Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule    52 500 Miles  87 500 km     L  Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote          Lubricate chassis compon
198. n fatal injuries  The shoulder belt should go  over the shoulder and across the chest  These parts of the  body are best able to take belt restraining forces    The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash          1 29       To unlatch the belt  just push the button on the buckle     1 30    Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for  Children and Small Adults    Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added  safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown  child restraints and for small adults  When installed on a  shoulder belt  the comfort guide pulls the belt away  from the neck and head     There is one guide for each outside passenger position in  the rear seat  To provide added safety belt comfort for  children who have outgrown child restraints and for  smaller adults  the comfort guides may be installed on  the shoulder belts  Here s how to install a comfort guide  and use the safety belt           1  Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of 2  Slide the guide under and past the belt  The elastic  the seatback and the interior body ro remove the cord must be under the belt  Then  place the guide  guide from its storage clip  over the belt  and insert the two edges of the belt into    the slots of the guide           3  Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat  4  Buckle  position and release the safety belt as  The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide described in    Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions     earlie
199. n on    For more detailed information and programming   instructions  refer to the Index for each individual   feature listed above     Matching Transmitter s  To Your Vehicle    Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to    prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle     If a transmitter is lost or stolen  a replacement              purchased through your dealer  Remember to bring any  remaining transmitters with you when you go to your  dealer  When the dealer matches the replacement  transmitter to your vehicle  any remaining transmitters  must also be matched  Once your dealer has coded the    new transmitter  the lost transmitter will not unlock your    vehicle  Each vehicle can have only four transmitters  matched to it     See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle     2 12    Battery Replacement    Under normal use  the battery in your remote keyless  entry transmitter should last about two years     You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t  work at the normal range in any location  If you have to  get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works   it   s probably time to change the battery        For battery replacement  use one Duracell    battery  type  DL 2032  or a similar type        To replace the battery  Trunk     l  Insert a coin into the notch near the keyring  Turn the      coin counterclockwise to separate the two halves of Trunk Lock Release  the transmitter  To unlock the trunk from the outside  in
200. n t add anything electrical to your Buick  unless you check with your dealer first  Some  electrical equipment        damage your vehicle  and the damage wouldn t be covered by your  warranty  Some add on electrical equipment can  keep other components from working as they  should            Your vehicle has an air bag systern  Before attempting to  add anything electrical to your Buick  see  Servicing  Your Air Bag Equipped Buick  in the Index        Headlamp Wiring    The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit  breaker  An electrical overload will cause the lamps to  eo on and off  or in some cases to remain off  If this  happens  have your headlamp system checked   right away     Windshield Wipers    The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal  circuit breaker and a fuse  If the motor overheats due to  heavy snow  elc   the wiper will stop until the motor  cools  If the overload is caused by some electrical  problem  be sure to have it fixed     Power Windows and Other Power  Accessories   Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power  windows and other power accessories  When the current  load is too heavy  the circuit breaker opens and closes   protecting the circuit until the problem 15 fixed or   goes away     Maxifuse Relay Center         check the fuses in this underhood fuse center  turn  the two knobs one quarter turn counterclockwise and  loosen the metal wing nut on the passenger side of the  cover  Then remove the cover  The inside
201. n t see or smell   an attendant  CO  It can cause unconsciousness and even death   If vou must drive with the trunk lid open or if  electrical wiring or other cable connections must  pass through the seal between the body and the  trunk lid    To secure the trunk  turn off the TRUNK RELEASE  e Make sure all windows are shut    lock the glove box  then take the door key with you     Turn the fan on your heating or cooling   Now the trunk button to the left of the steering column system to its highest speed with the setting   will not open the trunk  on VENT  That will force outside air into   your vehicle  See    Comfort Controls  in   the Index    The Remote Kevless Entry transmitter  if equipped   e If vou have air outlets on or under the   will open the trunk even if the trunk release lockout      switch is in the off position        Trunk Security Override    instrument panel  open them all the wav     See  Engine Exhaust       the Index           Theft    Vehicle theft is big business  especially in some cities     Although your Buick has a number of theft deterrent  features  we know that nothing we put on it can make  it impossible to steal  However  there are ways you  can help     Kev in the Ignition    If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside  it   s an  easy target for joy riders or professional thieves    so  don t do it     With the ignition off and the driver s door open  you ll    hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from    the ignition and take 
202. n the ignition 15 on  the brake system warning light  will also come on when you set your parking brake   The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t  release fully  If you try to drive off with the parking  brake set  a chime will also come on until you release  the parking brake  If the light and chime stay on after  your parking hrake is fully released  it means you have     brake problem     2 62                   _ _      _                         _    _       Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light    With the anti lock brake  system  the lieht s  will  come on when you start  your engine and may stay  on for several seconds   That s normal           If the light stays on  turn the ignition to OFF  Or  if the  light comes on when you re driving  stop as soon as  possible and turn the ignition off  Then start the engine  again to reset the system  If the light still stays on  or  comes on again while you re driving  your Buick needs  service  If the regular brake system warning light isn t  on  you still have brakes  but you don t have anti lock  brakes  If the regular brake system warning light is also  on  you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a  problem with your regular brakes  See  Brake Svstem  Warning Light  earlier in this section     The anti lock brake system warning light should come  on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN  If the  light doesn t come on then  have it fixed so it will be  ready to warn you if there is    problem     2 63  
203. n under one or   more of these conditions         n heavy city traffic where the outside  temperature regularly reaches 90 F   32  C  or higher         n hilly or mountainous terrain        When doing frequent trailer towing        Uses such as found in taxi  police or  delivery service     If you do not use your vehicle under any of these  conditions  the fluid and filter do not require changing           Short Trip City Main    51 000 Miles  85 000 km  54 000 Miles  90 000 km   L  Change engine oil and filter  or every L  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote         _  Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote 4     O Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote        ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY          es 7 17          57  000 Miles  95 000 km  60 000 Miles  100 000 km     C Change engine oil and filter  or every O Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first         Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote         _  Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote 4    C  Inspect engine accessory drive belt        Emiss
204. n your vehicle is hydroplaning   it has little or no contact with the road     Hydroplaning doesn t happen often  But it can if your  tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or  more 15 low  It can happen if a lot of water is standing on  the road  If you can see reflections from trees  telephone  poles or other vehicles  and raindrops    dimple    the  water s surface  there could be hydroplaning   Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds  There  just isn t    hard and fast rule about hydroplaning  The  best advice is to slow down when it is raining     Driving Through Deep Standing Water    NOTICE     If vou drive too quickly through deep puddles or  standing water  water can come in through your    engine s air intake and badly damage your  engine  Never drive through water that is slightly  lower than the underbody of your vehicle  If you  can t avoid deep puddles or standing water  drive  through them very slowly        Some Other Rainy Weather Tips       Besides slowing down  allow some extra following  distance  And be especially careful when you pass  another vehicle  Allow yourself more clear room  ahead  and be prepared to have your view restricted  by road spray         Have good tires with proper tread depth   See   Tires  in the Index         4 20        City Dri ving          are ways to increase your safety in city driving     e Know the best way to get to where you are going   Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown  part of the c
205. nance     Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Buick    Air bags affecti how your Buick should be serviced   There are parts of the air bag system in several places  around your vehicle  You don t want the system to  inflate while someone is working on vour vehicle  Your  Buick dealer and the LeSabre Service Manual have  information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag  system  To purchase    service manual  see  Service and  Owner Publications  in the Index     1 24       Center Passenger Position       Lap Belt    If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats  someone  can sit in the center positions        When you sit in a center seating position  you have a lap  safety belt  which has no retractor  To make the belt  longer  tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt                                                    __        To make the belt shorter  pull its free end as shown until  the belt is snug     Buckle  position and release it the same way as the lap  part of a lap shoulder belt  If the belt isn t long enough   see  Safety Belt Extender  at the end of this section     Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned  so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly  if you ever had to     1 26            Rear Seat Passengers    It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up   Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear  seal are hurt more often in crashes than those who are  wearing safety belts     Rear passeng
206. nd Lubricants    in the Index        Exterior cleaner and polish       Spot and stain removal          Cleans grease  grime and smoke film                                     Cleans vinyl  leather and rubber          Shines tires           fine scratches       Protects finish and removes       Finish Enhancer Spot cleans paint and gives high luster             Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl           6 53    Vehicle Identification Number  VIN                              s   SAMPLE4UXVMO    ENGINE      1 p      ASSEMBLY      CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT       This is the legal identifier for your Buick  It appears on  a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel  on the  driver s side  You can see it if you look through the  windshield from outside your vehicle  The VIN also  appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts  labels and the certificates of title and registration        Engine Identification   The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code  This  code will help you identify your engine  specifications  and replacement parts    Service Parts Identification Label    You ll find this label on your spare tire cover  It s very  helpful if you ever need to order parts  On this label is        your VIN       the model designation       paint information and      a list of all production options and special equipment     Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle     Electrical System  Add On Electrical Equipment    NOTICE     Do
207. nd SCAN will appear on the display  Use SCAN to  listen to stations for a few seconds  The radio will go to     station  stop for a few seconds  then go on to the next  station  Press one of the SEEK buttons again to stop  scanning  The sound will mute while scanning        PUSHBUTTONS  The six numbered pushbuttons let  you return to your favorite stations  You can set up to       stations  six       six        and six FMZ   Just     1  Turn the radio on   Press           to select the band     Tune in the desired station             ed    Press TONE to select the setting you prefer      gt     Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons  The  sound will mute  When it returns  release the button   Whenever vou press that numbered button  the  station you set will return and the tone you selected  will be automatically selected for that button     6  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     P SCAN  Press this button to listen to euch of your  preset stations for a few seconds  The radia will go to  the first preset station  stop for a few seconds  then go  on to the next preset station  Press P SCAN again to stop  scanning  If a preset station has weak reception  the  radio will not stop at the preset station    AUTO SET  Press this button and the system will seek  and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest       stations on your preset buttons  depending on which       band  AM or       you are listening to   AUTO SET  will flash while seeking and will remain on until 
208. nd the upper knob to move  the sound to the left or right speakers  The middle  position balances the sound between the speakers     FADE  Turn the control behind the lower knob to move  the sound to the front or rear speakers  The middle  position balances the sound between the speakers     3 14       AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Plaver       Plaving the Radio    VOLUME  This knob turns the system on and off  and controls th   volume  To increase volume and  turn the radio on  tum the knob clockwise  Turn it  counterclockwise to decrease volume        RECALL  Press the upper knob briefly to recall the  station being played or to display the clock  To change  what is normally shown on the display  station or time    press the knob until you see tne display vou want  then  hold the knob until the display flashes  If you press the  knob when the ignition is off  the clock will show for     few seconds     Finding a Station               Press the lower knob to switch hetween               and FMZ  The display shows your selection     TUNE  Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations     SEEK  Press the right or left arrow to go to the next  higher or lower station and stay there  The sound will  mute while seeking     SCAN  Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds   and SCAN will appear on the display  Use SCAN to  listen to stations for a few seconds  The radio will go to  a station  stop for a few seconds  then go on to the next  station  Press one of the SEEK arrows 
209. ndow down  Activate the system by locking the doors  with the power door lock switch while the door is open   or with the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter  Get out of  the vehicle  close the door and wait for the SECURITY  light to go out  Then reach in through the window   unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the  door  This should set off the alarm     If the alarm does not sound when it should  check to see  if the horn works  The horn fuse may be blown  To  replace the fuse  see    Fuses and Circuit Breakers  in  the Index     To reduce the possibility of theft  always activate the  theft deterrent system when leaving your vehicle               55        II    Your vehicle is equipped  with the PASS Kev      Personalized Automotive  Security System   theft deterrent system      PASS Key    is a passive  theft deterrent system    It works when you insert  or remove the key from  the ignition     PASS Kev II uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key  that matches a decoder in your vehicle     When the PASS Key II system senses that someone is  using the wrong key  it shuts down the vehicle s starter  and fuel systems  For about three minutes  the starter  won t work and fuel won t go to the engine  If someone  tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key  during this time  the vehicle will not start  This  discourages someone from randomly trying different  keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make  a match     2 17    The ignition k
210. nel will flash whenever you signal a turn       lane change  Properly hooked up  the trailer lamps  will also flash  telling other drivers you re about to turn   change lanes or stop     When towing a trailer  the green arrows on your  instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on  the trailer are burned out  Thus  you may think drivers  behind vou are seeing your signal when they are not   t s  important to check occasionally ta be sure the trailer  bulbs are still working     Your vehicle has bulb warning lights  When you plug a  trailer lighting system into your vehicle s lighting  system  tts bulb warning lights may not let you know if  one of your lamps goes oul  So  when you have a trailer  lighting system plugged in  be sure to check your  vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure  theyre all working  Once you disconnect the trailer  lamps  the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one  of your vehicle lamps is out        Driving On Grades    Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start  down a long or steep downgrade  If you don t shift  down  you might have to use your brakes so much that  they would get hot and no longer work well     Parking on Hills    You really should not park your vehicle  with a trailer  attached  on a hill  If something goes wrong  your rig  could start to move  People can be injured  and both  your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged     But if vou ever have to park your rig on a hill  heres  how t
211. ng Brake Chassis lubricant  GM Part  USAGE  FLUID LUBRICANT Cable Guides       12377985 or equivalent  or      lubricant meeting requirements of   Engine Oil   Engine oil with the American NLGI   2  Category LB or   Petroleum Institute Certified For GC LB    Gasoline Engines    Starburst      symbol of the proper viscosity  To   determine the preferred viscosity   for your vehicle s engine  see    Engine Oil  in the Index     Power Steering   GM Power Steering Fluid  GM  System Part No  1052884     pint   1050017     quart  or equivalent      Automatic                  Automatic    PE onu      Transaxle Transmission Fluid   Engine Coolant   50 50 mixture of clean water apa          preferably distilled  and GM  Goodwrench    DEX COOL or  Havoline  DEX COOL   silicate free  antifreeze  See   Engine Coolant    in the Index       Key Lock   Multi Purpose lubricant   Cylinders Superlube    GM Part  No  1234624   or equivalent         7 45       USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT    Hood and Door Multi purpose lubricant   Hinges Superlube    GM Part    USAGE FLUIDWLUBRICANT      Chassis Chassis lubricant  GM Part  Lubrication No  12377985 or equivalent  or   lubricant meeting requirements of             2  Category LB or  GC LB   GM Optikleen    Washer Solvent     Washer Solvent    GM Part No  1051515  or See  Replacement Parts  in the Index for recommended  equivalent  replacement filters and spark plugs     No  1234624  or equivalent      Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease  GM  Conditio
212. ng Outside Rearview  Mirror  If Equipped     If you have this feature  the driver s side outside mirror  will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you  This  feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the  automatic electrochromic day night rearview mirror  See     Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror  earlier in  this section     Convex Outside Mirror  Your passenger s side mirror is convex  A convex    mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from  the driver s seat        convex mirror can make things  like other    vehicles  look farther away than they really are   If you cut too sharply into the right lane  you  could hit a vehicle on your right  Check your  inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before  changing lanes     Storage Compartments  Glove Box    Use the door key to lock and unlock the glove box  To  open  lift the latch release on the left side of the glove  box door        Center Console Cupholder Coinholder       The armrest between the front seats opens into a storage  area  To open it  press the lever at the front edge     Inside  a cupholder flips forward and unfolds to hold  two cups  The cupholder is designed to break away  should it receive excessive pressure  If it breaks away   snap the edges back into place     There is also a removable coinholder  cassette tape and  compact disc storage area          2 51    Convenience Net  If Equipped        Your vehicle may have a convenience net  You ll see it  just inside the back w
213. nge your oil every   3 000 miles  5 000 km  or sooner if the CHANGE OIL  light comes on  Remember to reset the Oil Lite Monitor  when the oil has been changed  For more information   see  Engine Oil Life Monitor  in the Index          good time to check your brakes is during tire  rotation  See  Brake System Inspection  under  Periodic  Maintenance Inspections  in Part C of this schedule        If vou drive      a highly corrosive environment  your  brake calipers may require additional inspection and  service  at every other tire rotation  See     Caliper Knuckle Maintenance Inspection  under   Periodic Maintenance Inspections  in Part C of   this schedule        Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule       7 500 Miles  12 500 km  15 000 Miles  25 000 km    _  Change engine oil and filter  or every U Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first   12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service   Sce footnote     An Emission Control Service   Sce footnote       L  Lubricate chassis components  or every     Lubricate chassis components  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first   12 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote        See footnote  amp          Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  _  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information  pattern and additional information     See footnote      Se
214. ngine oil    should be checked at the dipstick then hrought up to the  proper level if necessary  See  Engine Oil    in the Index           Change Oil Soon Light  If Equipped     This light is activated by the  Engine Oil Life Monitor  System  The Engine Oil  Life Monitor determines the    condition of the engine oil  and lets vou know when the  oil should be changed  See   Engine Oil    in the Index     CHANGE    OIL SOON    It does this by electronically receiving data from the  Powertrain Control Module  The data it receives  contains information about engine speed  revolutions  per minute   coolant temperature and vehicle speed  The  Engine Oil Life Monitor uses this data to determine how  much the ei has degraded     2 69    When to change        oil depends      driving habits and  conditions because these directly affect engine speed    caolant temperature and vehicle speed  Because of this   the CHANGE OIL SOON light may turn on as early as  2 000 miles  3 218 km  or less for harsh circumstances     The CHANGE OIL SOON light is lit for five seconds  as a bulb check each time the ignition key is turned to  the RUN position  Tt will stay on for 60 seconds once   90 percent of the oil life has been used and cach time the  engine is started after that  If the CHANGE OIL SOON  light is on continuously  there is a problem with the Oil  Lite Monitor System and service is required     After changing the engine oil  the system should be  reset  This will cause the CHANGE OIL S
215. ning Part No  12345579 or equivalent         Hood Latch Lubriplate lubricant aerosol  GM  Assembly  Part No  12346293 or equivalent   Pivots  Spring or lubricant meeting requirements  Anchor and of NLGI   2  Category LB or  Release Paw    GC LB           7 46    Part E  Maintenance Record Any additional information from    Owner Checks and    Services  or    Periodic Maintenance  can be added on    Eres vi                   ne perioed  pecora the the following record pages  Also  vou should retain all  dte         reading and who pertormed the service maintenance receipts  Your owner information portfolio  in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval  is    convenient place to store them     Maintenance Record    ODOMETER  READING   SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED         Maintenance Record    ODOMETER    READING   SERVICED BY          MAINTENANCE PERFORMED    7 48                            READING       ODOMETER  READING       W Section 8 Customer Assistance Information       Here you will find out how to contact Buick if you need assistance  This section also tells you how to obtain service  publications and how to report any safety defects     8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 8 Warranty Information   5 4 Customer Assistance for Text 8 8 Reporting Safety Defects to the United  Telephone          Users States Government   8 5 Roadside Assistance 8 9 Reporting Safety Defects to the   8 5 Canadian Roadside Assistance Canadian Government   8 6 Courtesy Transport
216. no sign of steam or coolant before you    open the hood    If you keep driving when your engine is  overheated  the liquids in it can catch fire  You or  others could be badly burned  Stop your engine if  it overheats  and get out of the vehicle until the  engine is cool        NOTICE     If your engine catches fire because you keep  driving with no coolant  vour vehicle can be  badly damaged  The costly repairs would not he  covered by your warranty        If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine    If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no  steam  the problem may not be too serious  Sometimes  the engine can get a little too hot when you        Climb a long hill on a hot day   e Stop after high speed driving   e Idle for long periods in traffic      Tow a trailer     If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam    try this for a minute or so    1  Turn off your air conditioner    2  Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan  speed and open the window as necessary    3  If you re in a traffic jam  shift to NEUTRAL        otherwise  shift to the highest gear while  driving    AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  07  or  THIRD  3      If you no longer have the overheat warning  you  can drive  Just to be safe  drive slower for about  10 minutes  If the warning doesn t come back on   you can drive normally     If the warning continues  pull over  stop  and park your  vehicle right away    If there s still no sign of steam  you can idle the engine  for two or three minu
217. nstalling the  Spare Tire       2     2  Attach the wheel wrench to the bolt on the end of the  jack and rotate the wrench clockwise to raise the jack  head a few inches        3  Put the jack into a notch in the frame which is  located near each wheel well  The front notch is  10 inches  25 cm  back from the front wheel well   The rear notch is 8 inches  25       forward from the  rear wheel well    1  Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts  but  don t remove them    Getting under    vehicle when it is jacked up is  dangerous  If the vehicle slips off the jack  vou     could he badly injured or killed  Never get under     vehicle when it is supported only by a jack     NOTCHES       10   25            20          Raising vour vehicle with the jack improperly  positioned can damage the vehicle and even make  flat tire  Do not raise the vehicle yet  Put the compact the vehicle fall  To help avoid personal injury  spare tire near you  and vehicle damage  be sure to fit the jack lift  head into the proper location before raising   the vehicle     4  Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits  firmly on the ridge in the vehicle s frame nearest the                 5  Raise the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench  clockwise in the jack  Raise the vehicle far enough  so there s enough room for the spare tire to fit     6  Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire     5 30    7  Remove any rust or dirt  trom the wheel bolts   mounting surfaces and  spa
218. ntiveness and  judgment can be affected by even a small amount    of alcohol  You        have a serious    or even   fatal    collision if vou drive after drinking   Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver  who has been drinking  Ride home in a cab  or if  you re with a group  designate a driver who will  not drink        Control of a Vehicle    You have three systems that make your vehicle go where  you want it fo go  They are the brakes  the steering and  the accelerator  All three systems have to do their work  at the places where the tires meet the road        Sometimes  as when you re driving on snow or ice  it s  easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires  and road can provide  That means you can lose control  of your vehicle     4 6    Braking    Braking action involves perception time and  reaction time     First  vou have to decide to push on the brake pedal   That s perception time  Then you have to bring up your  foot and do     That s reaction time     Average reaction time 1s about 3 4 of a second  But  that s only an average  It might be less with one driver  and as long as two or three seconds or more with  another  Age  physical condition  alertness  coordination  and eyesight all play a part  So do alcohol  drugs and  frustration  But even      3 4 of a second     vehicle  moving at 60 mph  100 km h  travels      feet  20       That could be a lot of distance in an emergency  so  keeping enough space between your vehicle and others  i
219. o do it     1  Apply your regular brakes  but don t shift into  PARK       vet     E    3  When the wheel chocks are in place  release the  regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load    4  Reapply the regular brakes  Then apply your parking  brake  and then shilt to PARK              Release the regular brakes     Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels     When You Are Ready to Leave After  Parking on a Hill    1  Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down  while you      amp  Start your engine   e Shif into a gear  and       Release the parking brake           Let up on the hrake pedal   Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks     3  4  Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks     Maintenance When Trailer Towing    Your vehicle will need service more often when you re  pulling a trailer  See the Maintenance Schedule for more  an this  Things that are especially important in trailer  operation are automatic transaxle fluid  don t overfill    engine oil  belts  cooling system and brake adjustment   Each of these is covered in this manual  and the Index  will help vou find them quickly  If you re trailering  it s     good idea to review these sections before vou start  your trip     Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts  are                 4 39       NOTES     f    W Section 5 Problems on the Road       Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road     5 2 Hazurd Warning Flashers 5 2
220. o much force on the parking pawl in  the transaxle  You may find it difficult to pull the shift  lever out of PARK  P   This is called  torque lock   To  prevent torque lock  set the parking brake and then shift  into PARK  P  properly belore you leave the driver s  seat  To find out how  see    Shifting Into PARK  P   in  the Index     When you are ready to drive  move the shift lever out of  PARK  P  before you release the parking brake     If torque lock does occur  you may need to have another  vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the  pressure from the parking paw  in the transaxle  so vou  can pull the shift lever out of PARK  P      Shifting Out of PARK  P    Your Buick has a Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock   BTSD  You have to fully apply your regular brake  before you can shift from PARK  P  when the ignition  is in the RUN position  See  Automatic Transaxle  in  the Index    If you cannot shift out of PARK         ease pressure on  the shift lever    push the shift lever all the way into  PARK  P  as you maintain brake application  Then  move the shift lever into the gear you want  If you ever  hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of  PARK       try this    1  Turn the key to OFF    Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4   Shift to NEUTRAL  N      Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear  you want             Bo     Lh    Have the vehicle fixed as soon as vou can        Parking Over Things That Burn       Things that c
221. of silence between each selection for PREV to  work  The sound will mute while seeking        NEXT  2   Press this button to search for the next  selection on the tape  Your tape must have at least  three seconds of silence between each selection for  NEXT to work  The sound will mute while seeking     The SEEK up and down arrows will also find the  previous and next selections orn the tape     4413   Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly   Press it again to return to playing speed  The radio will  plav while the tape reverses     Pp  4   Press this button to advance quickly to another  part of the tape  Press the button again to return t    playing speed  The radio will play while the tape  advances     SIDE  5   Press this hutton to change the side of rhe  tape that is playing      XL   6   Press this button to reduce background noise   The double D symbol will appear on the display     Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license  from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation  Dolby  and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  Laboratories Licensing Corporation        AM FM  Press this button to play the radio when a  tape is in the player     SOURCE  Press this button to change to the tape  function when the radio is on  TAPE PLAY with an  arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active     EJECT  Press this button to remove the tape  The radio  will play  If you leave a cassette tape in the player while  listening to the radio  it may becom
222. on  your vehicle needs service        Engine Coolant Temperature  Warning Light      This light will tell you that  your engine coolant has  overheated OT Your  radiator cooling fans are  not working        If you have been operating your vehicle under normal  driving conditions  you should pull off the road  stop    your vehicle and turn the engine off as soon as possible     In the section    Problems on the Road     this manual  explains what to do  See    Engine Overheating    in  the Index        Engine Coolant Temperature Gage   If Equipped     If your vehicle is equipped  with the gage cluster  you  have a gage that shows the  engine coolant temperature   If the gage pointer moves  into the red area  your  engine is too hot     That reading means the same thing as the warning light   It means that your engine coolant has overheated  If you  have been operating your vehicle under normal driving  conditions  you should pull off the road  stop your  vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible     The engine coolant temperature gage indicates the  coolant temperature in degrees Fahrenheit  The  Canadian instrument panels indicate the coolant  temperature in degrees Celsius    In the section    Problems on the Road     this manual  explains what to do  See    Engine Overheating    in  the Index        Malfunction Indicator Lamp   Check Engine Light     Your Buick is equipped  with a computer which  monitors operation of the  fuel  ignition and emission  control syst
223. on fairly level ground  use the steps  that follow  If you re pulling a trailer  see   Towing a Trailer   in the Index           Pull the lever toward you     I  Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and  set the parking brake               Move the lever up as far as it will go     3  Turn the ignition key to LOCK    4  Remove the Key and take it with you  If you can  leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your  hand  your vehicle is in PARK              Leaving Your Vehicle With the  Engine Running    It can      dangerous to leave your vehicle with  the engine running  Your vehicle could move  suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P     with the parking brake firmly set  And  if vou  leave the vehicle with the engine running  it could  overheat and even catch fire  You or others could  be injured  Don t leave your vehicle with the  engine running unless you have to        If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine  running  be sure your vehicle is in PARK      and your  parking brake is firmly set before you leave it  After  you ve moved the shift lever inta the PARK  P   position  hold the regular brake pedal down  Then  see  if you can move the shift lever away from PARK  P   without first pulling it toward you  If you can  it means  that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK  P      2 29    Torque Lock    If vou are parking on a hill and you don t shift your  transaxle into PARK  P  properly  the weight of the  vehicle may put to
224. on is 6  Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the  positioned so vou would be able to unbuckle the retractor to set the lock   safety belt quickly if you ever had to           7  To tighten the belt  feed the lap belt back into the  retractor while you push down on the child restraint     8  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it is secure     To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle s  safety belt and let it zo back all the way  The safety belt   will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult  or larger child passenger        Larger Children       Children who have outgrown child restraints should  wear the vehicle s safety belts    Il you have the choice  a child should sit next to a  window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and  vet the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide     1 43    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  are restrained in the rear seat  But they need to use the  safety helts properly     9 Children who aren t buckled up can be thrown out in     crash       Children who aren t buckled up can strike other  people who               1 44        Never do this   Here two children are wearing the same belt  The  belt can t properly spread the impact forces  In a  crash  the two children can      crushed together  and seriously injured  A belt must be used by  only one person at a time                  What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt   bu
225. on while the engine is not running     RUN  D   The switch returns to this position after you  start your engine and release the key  This is the position  for normal driving  Even when the engine is not  running  you can use RUN to operate your electrical  power accessories and to display some instrument panel  warning lights    START  E   This position starts your engine  When the  engine starts  release the key and the switch will move  to the RUN position     NOTICE     If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t  turn it  be sure you are using the correct key  if  so  is it all the way in  If it is  then turn the  steering wheel left and right while you turn the  key hard  But turn the key only with your hand   Using a tool to force it could break the key or the  ignition switch  If nane of this works  then your  vehicle needs service        Key Reminder Warning   If you leave vour key in the ignition  in the OFF position   you will hear    warning chime when you open the  driver s door        Starting Your Engine  Move your shift lever t   PARK  P  or NEUTRAL        Your engine won t start in        other position    that   s a    safety feature  To restart when you re already moving  n      use NEUTRAL  N  only 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be    EM    drained much sooner  And the excessive heat can  NOTICE     damage your starter motor   Don t try to shift to PARK  Pi if your Buick  is moving  If vou do  you could damage the  transaxle  Shift to PA
226. ons from the Short Trip City Maintenance  Schedule is true  Do not use this schedule if the vehicle  is used for trailer towing  driven in a dusty area or used  off paved roads  Use the Short Trip City schedule for  these conditions    Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under    highway conditions causes engine oil to break  down slower       Long Trip Highway Intervals    Every 7 500 Miles  12 504 km   Engine Oil and Filter  Change  or every 12 months  whichever occurs first    Chassis Lubrication  or every 12 months  whichever  occurs first   Tire Rotation    Every 30 000 Miles  50 000 km   Air Cleaner Filter  Replacement  Fuel Tank  Cap and Lines Inspection   Every 50 000 Miles  83 000 km   Automatic Transaxle   Service  severe conditions only     Every 60 000 Miles  100 000 km   Engine Accessory  Drive Belt Inspection    Every 100 000 Miles  166 000 km   Spark Plug Wire  Inspection  Spark Plug Replacement    Every 150 000 Miles  240 000 km   Cooling System  Service  or every 60 months  whichever occurs first     These intervals only summarize maintenance services     Be sure to follew the complete maintenance schedule on  rhe following pages        The services shown in this schedule up to 1O40 000 miles   166 000 km  should be performed after 100 000 miles   166  00 km  at the same intervals  The services shown  at 150 000 miles  240 000         should be performed at  the same interval after 150 000 miles  240  4X  km     See  Owner Checks and Services  and  P
227. ooks  Use T hooks instead        Front Towing         Attach T hook chains       on both sides in the  slotted holes in the  bottom of the cradle   behind the front wheels        Position a 4  x 4  wood beam across sling chains  contacting the bottom of the radiator support  Position  the lower sling crossbar directly under the front bumper        5 10    Rear Towing  Tow Limits    55 mph  88 kmi  59  miles  SOO          Attach T hook chains to   slots in the bottom of the    floor pan directly ahead     af the rear wheels on     both sides        No4   x 4  wood beam is needed        Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end  of each control arm           Position the lower sling crossbar directly behind and at  the lower edge of the rear humper cover     5 12    Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end  of each lower control arm        Engine Overheating    You will find a coolant light or a warning light about     hot engine on your Buick   instrument panel  If you    have the optional gage cluster  vou may also have a Steam from an overheated engine can burn you  coolant temperature warning gage  See  Eneine Coolant badly  even if you just open the hood  Stay away  Temperature Warning Light  ar  Engine Coolant from the engine if you see or hear steam coming    Temperature Gage  in the Index    from it  Just turn it off and get everyone away  from the vehicle until it cools down  Wait until    If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine n  B    there is 
228. or  example  speed  altitude  road grades  outside  temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a  trailer are all important  And  it can also depend on any  special equipment that you have on your vehicle     You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or  advice  or you can write us at     Buick Motor Division   Customer Relations Center  902 E  Hamilton Avenue  Flint  MI 48550    In Canada  write to     General Motars of Canada Limited  Customer Communication Centre   908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario LIH 8P7       Weight of the Trailer Tongue    The tongue load  A  of any trailer is an important  weight to measure because it affects the total capacity  weight of your vehicle  The capacity weight includes the  curb weight of the vehicle  any cargo you may carry in  it  and the people who will be riding in the vehicle  And  if you will tow a trailer  you must subtract the tongue  load from your vehicle s capacity weight because your  vehicle will be carrying that weight  too  See  Loading  Your Vehicle  in the Index for more information about  your vehicle s maximum load capacity        4 35    If you re using    weight carrying hitch  the trailer  tongue  A  should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded  trailer weight  B   If you have a weight distributing  hitch  the trailer tongue  A  should weigh 12 percent of  the total loaded trailer weight  B      Alter you ve loaded your trailer  weigh the trailer and  then the tongue  separately  to see if
229. or 24 months   whichever occurs first  Damage caused by the use  of coolant other than DEX COOL   is not  covered by your new vehicle warranty     What to Use    Use a mixture of one half clean w ater  preferably  distilled  and one half DEX  COOL  coolant which  won t damage aluminum parts  If you use this mixture  you don t need to add anything else     6 20            Adding only plain water to your cooling system  can be dangerous  Plain water  or some other  liquid like alcohol  can boil before the proper  coolant mix will  Your vehicle s coolant warning    system is set for the proper coolant mix  With  plain water or the wrong mix  your engine could  get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat  warning  Your engine could catch fire and you or  others could be burned  Use a 50 50 mix of clean  water and DEX COOL    coolant               Checking Coolant  NOTICE     If you use an improper coolant mix  your engine  could overheat and be badly damaged  The  repair cost wouldn t be covered by vour  warranty  Too much water in the mix can freeze  and crack the engine  radiator  heater core and  other parts        If you have to add coolant more than four times a year   have your dealer check your cooling system        NOTICE             When your engine is cold  the coolant level should be at  If you use the proper coolant  you don   t have to FULL COLD or a little higher  When your engine is  add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to warm  the level should be up to
230. or traffic signs  pavement markings and lines   If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a  turn or an intersection  delay your pass     broken  center line usually indicates it   s all right to pass   providing the road ahead is clear   Never cross a  salid lime on your side of the lane or a double  solic line  even if the road seems empty of  approaching traffic          4 13        Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass    while you re awaiting an opportunity  For one thing   following too closely reduces your area of vision   especially if you re following a larger vehicle    Also  you won t have adequate space if the vehicle  ahead suddenly slows or stops  Keep back a  reasonable distance     When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up   start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t  get too close  Time your move so you will he  increasing speed as the time comes to move into the  other lane  If the way is clear to pass  you will have a   running start  that more than makes up for the  distance vou would lose by dropping back  And if  something happens to cause you to cancel your pass   you need only slow down and drop back again and  wait for another opportunity     If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle  wait  your turn  But take care that someone isn t trying to  pass vou as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle   Remember to glance over your shoulder and check  the blind spot     4 14    Check your mirrors  glance ov
231. oration     This manual includes the latest information at the time it  was printed  We reserve the right to make changes in the  product after that time without further notice  For  vehicles first sold in Canada  substitute the name   General Motors of Canada Limited  for Buick Motor  Division whenever it appears in this manual    Please keep this manual in your Buick  so it will be there  if you ever need it when you re on the road  If you sell  the vehicle  please leave this manual in it so the new  owner        use it     Litho in U S A   Part No  25660692 C Second Edition           We support voluntary  technician certification          5     CERTIFIED    WE BLIPPORT  VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN    CERTIFICATION THEOLKSH  Amin notin fo  AUTOMOTIVE  SERVICE    EXCELLENCE    For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a  French Language Manual   Aux propri  taires canadiens  Vous pouvez vous  procurer un exemplaire de ce euide en francais chez  votre concessionaire ou         DGN Marketing Services Ltd    1500 Bonhill Rd    Mississauga  Ontario LAT            Copyright General Motors Corporation 1996       Rights Reserved       Buick Motor Division   provides one of the most dramatic  and important chapters in the history  of the American automobile    David Dunbar Buick          Walter Marr and Thomas Buick    Buick s chief engineer  Walter L  Marr  left   and  Thomas D  Buick  son of founder David Dunbar Buick   drove the first Flint Buick in a successful Flint Detroit  round trip in July 1
232. otnote        SERVICED BY        ACTUAL MILEAGE       7 34          Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule       75 000 Miles  125 000 km  82 500 Miles  137 500 km    _  Change engine oil and filter  or every  _  Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first   12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Entission Control Service   See footnote      Lubricate chassis components  or every   Lubricate chassis components  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first   12 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote      See footnote 4     _  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and   Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information  pattern and additional information      See footnote      Also see footnote       See footnote        ACTUAL MILEAGE       SERVICED BY  ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule    90 000 Miles  150 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote       C  Lubricate chassis components  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote f            _  Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage  or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any  damage  Replace parts as needed   An Emission Control Service   See footnote         Rotate tires  See    T
233. ou could be hurt        Adding Equipment to the Outside of   Your Vehicle   Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can  affect the airflow around it  This may cause wind noise  and affect windshield washer performance  Check with  vour Buick dealer before adding equipment to the  outside of vour vehicle     Fuel    Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or  higher  Ata minimum  it should meet specifications  ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3 5 M93  in Canada  Improved gasoline specifications have been  developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers  Association  AAMA  for better vehicle performance  and engine protection  Gasolines meeting the A AMA  specification could provide improved driveability and  emission control system protection compared to   other gasolines     Be sure the posted octane is at least 87  If the octane is  less than 87  you may get a heavy knocking noise when    you drive  If it   s bad enough  it can damage your engine        If you re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you  sull hear heavy knocking  your engine needs service   But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when  you re accelerating or driving up a hill  Thats normal   and vou don t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid  af pinging  It s the heavy  constant knock that means  you have a problem     If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission  Standards  indicated on the underhood tune up label   it  is designed to Ope
234. our dealer for fuse replacement        6 59                mejam            EJ    E  LILI Cl                         1     LIL              as    L    GHE       V            L          LIL Co         oo                      irl                  E  E    d            ae                        3              jo o                     Sor       nij  10     6 60               pO       amp  th Je n b        Usage  Door Locks    Trunk Release  RAC    Horns   Not Used   Miscellaneous Engine Controls  Fuel Pump   Injectors   Powertrain Control Module  Not Used   Not Used   A C Programmer   Not Used       Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications    Front Outside Lamps Bulb The following approximate capacities are given in           Lamy e ue erac 2156 English and metric conversions  Please refer to  Halogen Headlamps    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in the Index for                                                 more information                  ons  Parking Turn Signal Lamps 2 2    1357 Automatic Transaxle AT  Overdrive   Rear Outside Lamps Pan Removal and Replacement     6 5 quarts  6 1       Back Up Lamps       ves sisse  3156 Alter Complete Overhaul          IO quarts  9 5 L   Sademarker Lamps x ern Ee ALES                                   194 When drajuing or replacing forge Converter  more Huid  Pai iG MNCS Mu ME NUN MM 194 may he needed   Tail Stop Turn Signal lamps 22222220222    3357 Cooling System                      quarts  12 3 L   Engine Crankease          
235. owever  if you notice unusual tire wear or  vour vehicle pulling one way or the other  the alignment  may need to be reset  If you notice your vehicle  vibrating when driving on a smooth road  your wheels  may need to be rebalanced     Wheel Replacement    Replace any wheel that is bent  cracked  or badly rusted  or corroded  If wheel nuts keep coming loose  the wheel   wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced  If the  wheel leaks air  replace it  except some aluminum  wheels  which can sometimes be repaired   See your  Buick dealer if any of these conditions exist    Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need   Each new wheel should have the same load carrying  capacity  diameter  width  offset and be mounted the  same way as the one it replaces    If you need to replace any of your wheels  wheel bolts  or wheel nuts  replace them only with new GM original  equipment parts  This way  you will he sure to have the  right wheel  wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your   Buick model        Used Replacement Wheels    Using the wrong replacement wheels  wheel bolts  or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous   It could affect the braking and handling of your  vehicle  make your tires lose air and make vou  lose control  You could have a collision in which  you or others could be injured  Always use the  correct wheel  wheel bolts and wheel nuts   for replacement     Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is  dangerous  You can t know how it s been used or  how far it s be
236. passengers  belts  Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the are fastened properly too    restraint is closest to the top of your ears  This position  reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash         r  L    n    It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area   inside or outside of a vehicle  In a collision   people riding in these areas are more likely to be    seriously injured or killed  Do not allow people to  ride in any area of your vehicle that is not  equipped with seats and safety belts  Be sure  everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a  safety belt properly     Your vehicle has a light that  comes on as a reminder to  buckle up   See    Safety Bell  Reminder Light  in   the Index            In most states and Canadian provinces  the law says to  wear safety belts  Here s why  They work    You never know tf you ll be in a crash  IF you do have     crash  vou don t know if it will be a bad one    A few crashes are mild  and some crashes can he so  serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive   But most crashes are in between  In many of them   people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk  away  Without belts they could have been badly hurt   or killed     After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles  the   acts are clear  In most crashes buckling up does  matter     a lot     Why Safety Belts Work    When you ride in or on anything  you go as fast as  il gots           Take the simplest vehicle  Suppose it s 
237. peakers  The middle  position balances the sound between the speakers   Plaving a Cassette Tape   The longer side with the tape visible should face to the  right  If the ignition and the radio are on  the tape can be  inserted and will hegin playing  H you hear nothing or  hear a garbled sound  the tape may not be in squarely   Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over     3 16    While the tape is playing  use the VOLUME  FADE   BAL  BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the  radio  Other controls may have different functions when     lape is inserted  The display will show an arrow to  show which side of the tape is playing     If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is  off  first press            or RECALL  Note that the  cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc  players will work im your cassette tape player     Your tape bias is set automatically     It E and  a number appear on the radio display  the tape  won t play because of an error     e El    The tape is tight and the player can t tum the  tape hubs  Remove the tape  Hold the tape with the  open end down and try to turn the right hub  counterclockwise with a pencil  Turn the tape over  and repeat  I the hubs do not turn easily  your tape  may be damaged and should not he used in the  player  Try a new tape to make sure your player is  working properly       Ell  The tape is broken  Try    new tape    If        error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be   corrected  please 
238. pecific vehicle design  so that       it can be somewhat above or below this range  If your  vehicle strikes something that will move or deform  such  as a parked car  the threshold level will be higher  The  air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers  side  impacts or rear impacts  because inflation would not  help the occupant     In any particular crash  no one can say whether an aur  bag should have inflated simply because of the damage  to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were   Inflation 1s determined by the angle of the impact and  how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or  near frontal impacts     What makes an air bag inflate     In an impact of sufficient severity  the air bag sensing  system detects that the vehicle is in a crash  The sensing  system triggers    release of gas from the inflator  which  inflates the air         The inflator  air bag and related  hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the  steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the  right front passenger        How does      air bag restrain     In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions   even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the  instrument panel  Air bags supplement the protection  provided by safety belts  Air bags distribute the force ol  the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body   stopping the occupant more gradually  But air bags would  not help you in many types of collisions  including  rollover
239. pose Powdered Cleaner following the  directions on the container label        4  Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge  Don t  saturate the material and don t rub it roughly     5  As soon as vou ve cleaned the section  use    sponge  to remove the suds         Rinse the section with a clean  wet sponge     Wipe off what s left with a slightly damp paper towel  or cloth     8  Dry it immediately with a blow dryer     9  Wipe with a clean cloth     Using Solvent Tvpe Cleaner on Fahric    First  see if you have to use solvent type cleaner at all   Some spots and stains will clean off better with just  water and mild soap    If vou need to use a solvent     1  Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with     clean  dull knife or scraper     15    Use very little cleaner  light pressure and clean cloths   preferably cheesecloth   Cleaning should start at the  outside of the stain     feathering    toward the center     3  Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth     4  When you clean a stain from fabric  immediately dry the    area with a blow dryer to help prevent a cleaning ring     6 47    Special Cleaning Problems    Greasy or Oily Stains    Stains caused by grease  oil  butter  margarine  shoe  polish  coffee with cream  chewing gum  cosmetic  creams  Vegetable oils  wax crayon  tar and asphalt can  be removed as follows     1  Carefully scrape off excess stain   2  Follow the solvent type instructions  described earlier   Shoe polish  wax crayon  tar and
240. press  the TRACTION  CONTROL button on the  instrument panel to the left  of the steering wheel        The traction control system warning light will come on  and stay on  If the system is limitinz wheel spin when  vou press the button  the warning light will come   on     but the system won t turn off right away    It will wait until there s no longer a current need to limit  wheel spin     4 10    You can turn the system back on al any time by pressing  the button again  The traction control system warning  light should      off     Braking in Emergencies    With anti lock  you can steer and brake at the same  time  In many emergencies  steering can help you more  than even the very best braking     Steering    Power Steering    If you lose power steering assist because the engine  stops or the system is not functioning  you can steer but  it will take much more effort     Magnasteer    If Equipped     Your vehicle may be equipped with GM Magnasteer         steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you  feel when steering at all vehicle speeds  It provides ease  when parking  yet a firm  solid feel at highway speeds   Your steering can be adjusted for an easier or more finm  setting  See your dealer for information        Steering Tips  Driving on Curves  It s important to take curves at    reasonable speed     A lot of the  driver lost control    accidents mentioned on  the news happen on curves  Here s why     Experienced driver or beginner  euch of us is subje
241. putes  This program is available   ree of charge to customers who currently own or lease a  GM vehicle     If you are not satisfied after following the Customer  Satisfaction Procedure  you may contact the BBB using  the toll free telephone number  or write them at the  following address     BBB AUTO LINE   Council of Better Business Bureaus  Inc   4200 Wilson Boulevard   Suite SUL   Arlington       22203   804   Telephone  1 800 955 5100    To file a claim  you will be asked to provide your name  and address  your Vehicle Identification Number  VIN   and a statement of the nature of your complaint   Eligibility 15 limited by vehicle age and mileage  and  other factors     We prefer you utilize the Custamer Satisfaction  Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE  hut you  may contact the BBB at any time  The BBB will attempt  to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary  I  this mediation is unsuccessful  an informal hearing will  be scheduled where eligible customers may present their  case to an impartial third party arbitrator     The arbitrator will make a decision which vou may  accept or reject  If vou accept the decision  GM will he  bound by that decision  The entire dispute resolution  procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the  time you file a claim until a decision is made    Some state laws may require you to use this program  hefore filing a claim with a state run arbitration program  or in the courts  For further information  contact the  BBB 
242. quent  driving in stop and vo traffic      Most trips are through dusty areas     You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of    your vehicle     e If the vehicle is used for delivery service  police  taxi  ar other commercial application     One of the reasons vou should follow this schedule if  veu operate your vehicle under any of these conditions  is that these conditions cause engine ail to break   down sooner        Short Trip City Intervals    Every 3 000 Miles  5 000 km   Engine Oil and Filter  Change  or 3 months  whichever occurs first     Every 6 000 Miles  10  44  km   Chassis Lubrication        6 months  whichever occurs first   Tire Rotation    Every 15 000 Miles  25 000 km   Air Cleaner Filter  Inspection  if driving in dusty conditions    Every 30 000 Miles  50 000 Km   Air Cleaner Filter  Replacement  Fuel Tank  Cap and Lines Inspection   Every 50 000 Miles  83 000 Km   Automatic Transaxle   Service  severe conditions only     Every 60 000 Miles  100 000 km   Engine Accessory  Drive Belt Inspection   Every 00 000 Miles  166 000 Km   Spark Plug Wire  Inspection  Spark Plug Replacement   Every 150 004 Miles  240 000 km   Cooling System  Service  or every 60 months  whichever occurs first    These intervals only summarize maintenance services   Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule       the following pages     7 5    Maintenance Schedule    Long Trip Highway Definition       Follow this maintenance schedule oniy if none of the  conditi
243. r  or every C  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote      _  Lubricate chassis components  or every     Inspect air cleaner filter if vou are driving  6 months  whichever occurs first   in dusty conditions  Replace filter if   See footnote     necessary  An Emission Control Service   _  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and    See footnote          Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation    pattern and additional information    See footnote      Also see footnote                78 000 Miles  130 000 km    81 000 Miles  135 000 km     O Change engine oil and filter  or every   O Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first     3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote       An Emission Control Service   See footnote        C Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote          _  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information    See footnote              84 000 Miles  140 000 kin     C  Change engine oil and filter  or every   3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service   See footnote      _  Lubricate chassis components  or every   6 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote             Rotate tires
244. r bag system  won t be there to help protect you in another crash      new system will include air bag modules and  possibly other parts  The service manual for your  vehicle covers the need to replace other parts     Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and  diagnostic module  which records information about  the air hag system  The module records information  about the readiness of the system  when the sensors are  activated and driver s safety belt usage at deployment     1 23    e Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag  system  Improper service can mean that WOU  air bag system won t work properly  See your cealer  for service     NOTICE     For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is  turned off and the battery is disconnected  an air  bag can still inflate during improper service  You    can be injured if vou are close to an air bag when  it inflates  Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape  or yellow connectors  They are probably part of  the air bag system  Be sure to follow proper  service procedures  and make sure the person  performing work for you is qualified to do so     If vou damage the covering for the driver s or the  right front passenger s air bag  the bag may not  work properly  You may have to replace the air  bag module in the steering wheel or both the air  bag module and the instrument panel for the  right front passenger s air bag  Do not open or  break the air bag coverings        The wir bag system does not need regular mainte
245. r can then install the anchor for you  In Canada   this work will be done for you free of charge  Or  you  may install the anchor yourself using the instructions  provided in the kit     Securing a Child Restraint         Rear  Outside Seat Position       You ll be using the lap shoulder belt  See the earlier part   about the top strap if the child restraint has one    1  Put the restraint on the seat  Follow the instructions  for the child restraint             Secure the child in the child restraint as the  instructions say     3  Pick up the latch plate  and run the lap and shoulder  portions of the vehicle   s safety belt through or  around the restraint  The child restraint instructions  will show you how        4  Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed     If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or  neck  put it behind the child restraint                                                                  1 37                5  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release button is 6  To tighten the belt  pull up on the shoulder belt while  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the you push down on the child restraint   safety belt quickly if you ever had to     7  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it is secure    To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle s   safety belt and let rt go back all the way  The safety belt   will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult   or larger child pas
246. r in this section  Make sure that the shoulder    belt crosses the shoulder     arn top        1 32    To remove and store the comfort guides  squeeze the belt  edges together so that you can take them out from the  guides  Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip   and then slide the guide onto the clip  Rotate the guide and  clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior  body  leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed     Children    Everyone in a vehicle needs protection  That includes  infants and all children smaller than adult size  In fact   the law in every state in the United States and in every  Canadian province says children up to some age must be  restrained while in a vehicle        Smaller Children and Babies    Smaller children and babies should always be  restrained in a child or infant restraint  The  instructions for the restraint will say whether it is  the right type and size for your child  A very  young child s hip bones are so small that       regular belt might not stay low on the hips  as it  should  Instead  the belt will likely be over the  child s abdomen  In a crash  the belt would apply  force right on the child s abdomen  which could  cause serious or fatal injuries  So  be sure that  any child small enough for one is always properly  restrained in a child or infant restraint        1 33    Never hold a baby      your arms while riding in     vehicle  A baby doesn t weigh much    until a  crash  During a crash    baby wil
247. rate on fuels that meet California  specifications  If such fuels are not available in states  adopting California emissions standards  your vehicle  will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal  specifications  but emission control system performance  may be affected  The malfunction indicator lamp on  your instrument panel may turn on and or your vehicle  may fail a smog check test     this occurs  return to your  authorized Buick dealer for diagnosis to determine the  cause of failure  In the event it is determined that the  cause of the condition is the type of fuels used  repairs         not be covered by your warranty     6 3    Some gasolines that are not reformulated For low  emissions contain an octane enhancing additive called  methyleyclopentadieny  manganese tricarbonyl  MMT    ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel  contains         General Motors does not recommend the  use of such gasolines  If fuels containing MMT are used   spark plug life may be reduced and your emission  control system performance may be affected  The  malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel  may turn on  If this occurs  return to your authorized  Buick dealer for service     To provide cleaner air  all gasolines in the United States  are now required to contain additives that will help  prevent deposits from forming in vour engine and fuel  system  allowing your emission control system to  function properly  Therefore  you should not have to add  anyt
248. re inflated to the correct pressures   See    Tires    in the Index for further details   Cassette Deck Service    Clean cassette deck  Cleaning should be done every  50 hours of tape play  See    Audio Systems  in the Index  lor further details          7 39    At Least Twice    Year    Restraint System Check    Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your  belts  buckles  latch plates  retractors and anchorages are  working properly  Look for any other loose or damaged  safety belt system parts  If you see anything that might  keep a safety belt system from doing its job  have it  repaired  Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced   Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings   and have them repaired or replaced   The air bag system  does not need regular maintenance      Wiper Blade Check   Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking  Replace blade  inserts that appear wom or damaged or that streak or  miss areas of the windshield  Also see  Wiper Blades   Cleaning  in the Index     Automatic Transaxle Check    Check the transaxle fluid level  add if needed  See   Automatic Transaxle  in the Index  A fluid loss may  indicate a problem  Check the system and repair   if needed     7 40    At Least Once a Year    Key Lock Cylinders Service    Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant  specified in Part D     Body Lubrication Service    Lubricate all body door hinges  Also lubricate all hinges  and latches  including those for the hood  glove box
249. re wheel     Rust or dirt on the wheel  or on the parts to  which it is fastened  can make the wheel nuts  become loose after a time  The wheel could come  off and cause an accident  When vou change     wheel  remove any rust or dirt from the places  where the wheel attaches to the vehicle  In an  emergency  you can use a cloth or a paper towel  to do this  but be sure to use    scraper or wire  brush later  if vou need to  to get all the rust or  dirt off                    CAUTION     Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts  If you  do  the nuts might come loose  Your wheel could  fall off  causing a serious accident        8  Place the spare on the  wheel mounting surface  and replace the wheel  nuts with the rounded  end of the nuts toward  the wheel  10       Lower the vehicle by rotating the wheel  wrench counterclockwise on the jack  Lower  the jack completely        9  Make sure each wheel stud is centered in each wheel  hole while tightening the nuts  Tighten each nut by  hand until the wheel is held against the hub     E 5 3       Tighten the wheel nuts  firmly in a criss cross  sequence        Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened  wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose  and even come off  This could lead to an accident     Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts  If vou have  to replace them  be sure to get new GM original  equipment wheel nuts     Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the  nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb ft   140 
250. recovery tank is at the  FULL COLD mark  start your vehicle    If the overheat warning continues  theres one more  thing you can try  You can add the proper coolant mix  directly to the radiator  but be sure the cooling system is  cool before you do it     Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling    system can blow out and burn you badly  They   are under pressure  and if you turn the radiator   pressure cap    even a little    they        come oul  CAUTION   Continued        5 18          How to Add Coolant to the Radiator       2  Then keep turning the pressure cap  but now push    down as you turn it  Remove the pressure cap     1  You        remove the radiator pressure cap when  the cooling system  including the radiator pressure  cap and upper radiator hose  is no longer hot  Turn  the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it  first stops   Don t press down while turning the  pressure cap      If you hear a hiss  wait for that to stop  A hiss means  there is still some pressure left           3  Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL   4  Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL  coolant mixture  up to the base of the filler neck  COLD mark     5  Put the        back on the coolant recovery tank  but  leave the radiator pressure cap off           6  Start the engine and let it run until vou can  eel the     Then replace the pressure         At any time during  upper radiator hose getting hot  Watch out for the this procedure if coolant begins to flo
251. rotation or changing  When you have the front brakes  replaced  have the rear brakes inspected  too     Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  axle sets    See  Brake System Inspection  in Section 7 of this  manual under Part C  Periodic Maintenance  Inspections      6 27    Brake Pedal Travel    See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to  normal height  or if there is a rapid increase in pedal  travel  This could be a sign of brake trouble     Brake Adjustment    Every time you apply the brakes  with or without the  vehicle moving  your brakes adjust for wear     Replacing Brake System Parts    The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex  Its  many parts have to be of top quality and work well  together if the vehicle is to have really good braking   Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality  GM brake parts  When you replace parts of your braking  system    for example  when your brake linings wear  down and you have to have new ones put in     be sure  you get new approved GM replacement parts  If you  don t  your brakes may no longer work properly  For  example  if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong  for your vehicle  the balance between your front and  rear brakes can change    for the worse  The braking  performance you ve come 10 expect can change in many  other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement  brake parts     Battery    Every new Buick has a Deleo Freedom   battery  You  never have to add water to one a
252. s   every year     Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive  a vehicle         Judgment      Muscular Coordination     Vision      Allentiveness     Police records show that almost half of all motor  vehicle related deaths involve alcohol  In most cases   these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking  and driving  In recent years  some 17 000 annual motor  vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use  of alcohol  with more than 300 000 people injured     Many adults    by some estimates  nearly half the adult  population    choose never to drink alcohol  so they  never drive after drinking  For persons under 21  it s  against the law in every U S  state to drink alcohol   There are good medical  psychological and  developmental reasons for these laws        The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem  is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive  But  what if people do  How much is    too much  if the  driver plans to drive  It s a lot less than many might  think  Although it depends on each person and situation   here is some general information on the problem     The Blood Alcohol Concentration  BAC  of someone  who is drinking depends upon four things        The amount of alcohol consumed  e The drinker s body weight       The amount of food that is consumed before and  during drinking    e The length of time it has taken the drinker to  consume the alcohol     According to the American Medical Association  a  18O0 Ib   8
253. s  rear impacts and side impacts  primarily because  an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags  Air  bags should never be regarded as anything more than     supplement to safety belts  and then only in moderate to  severe frontal or near frontal collisions        What will you see after an air bag inflates     After an air bag inflates  it quickly deflates  so quickly  that some people may not even realize the air bag  inflated  Same components of the air bag module in the  steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag  or the  instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag  will  be hot for a short time  The parts of the bag that come  into contact with vou may be warm  but not too hot t    touch  There will he some smoke and dust coming from  vents in the deflated air bags  Air bag inflation doesn t  prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to  steer the vehicle  nor does it stop people from leaving  the vehicle        When an air bag inflates  there is dust in the air   This dust could cause breathing problems for  people with a history of asthma or other    breathing trouble  To avoid this  everyone in the  vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so   If vou have breathing problems but can t get out  of the vehicle after an air bag inflates  then get  fresh air by opening a window or door        Air bags are designed to inflate only once  After they  inflate  you ll need some new parts for your air bag  system  If you don t get them  the ai
254. s BTS     needs service     7 41       Ignition Transaxle Lock Check    While parked  and with the parking brake set  try to turn  the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position         The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift  lever is in PARK  P         The key should come out only in LOCK     Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK  P   Mechanism Check    When vou are doing this check  vour vehicle  could begin to move  You or others could be    injured and property could be damaged  Make  sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case  it begins to roll  Be ready to apply the regular     brake at once should the vehicle begin to move        7 42    Park on a fairly steep hill  with the vehicle facing  downhill  Keeping your foot on the regular brake  set the  parking brake       To check the parking brake s holding ability  With  the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL        slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake  pedal  Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking  brake only        Tocheck the PARK  P  mechanism s holding ability   With the engine running  shift to PARK  P   Then  release all brakes     Underbody Flushing Service    At least every spring  use plain water to flush any  corrosive materials from the underbody  Take care to  clean thoroughly any areas where mud und other debris  ean collect        Part      Periodic Maintenance  Inspections    Listed below are inspections and services which should  be performed at 
255. s and bold the door lock switch throughout this  procedure  All doors will lock     Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again   Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the horn will  chirp one time    Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again   Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the horn will  chirp two times    Release the door lock switch  The perimeter lighting  feature is now on     Front Reading Lamps  If Equipped  Rear Reading Lamps  If Equipped     Front seat reading lamps are turned on or off by pressing The lamp  switch and a coat hanger are above cach rear  the LAMP switch  door  Slide the switch to turn the lamp on or off           2 46    Battery Rundown Protection    This feature turns off the courtesy  reading  trunk  glove  box and visor vanity mirror lamps  if any are left on for  more than 10 minutes when the ignition is OFF  This  will keep your battery from running down     This feature also shuts off the exterior lamps tf they are  left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is  OFF  You may override this feature for the exterior  lamps by turning the lamps off and then back on after  the ignition is turned to OFF  If you do this  the exterior  lamps will stay on until you manually turn them off    If the feature is enabled for the interior and exterior  lamps  all lamps should turn off at approximately the  same time     Mirrors    Day Night Manual Rearview Mirror       When vou are sitting in    comfortable driving position   adjust
256. s important     And  of course  actual stopping distances vary greatly  with the surface of the road  whether it s pavement or  gravel   the condition of the road  wet  dry  icy   tire  tread  the condition of your brakes  the weight of the  vehicle and the amount of brake force applied        Avoid needless heavy braking  Some people drive in  spurts    heavy acceleration followed by heavy   braking    rather than keeping pace with traffic  This is a  mistake  Your brakes may not have time to cool between  hard stops  Your brakes will wear out much faster if you  do a lot of heavy braking  If you keep pace with the  traffic and allow realistic following distances  you will  eliminate    lot of unnecessary braking  That means  better braking and longer brake life     If your engine ever stops while you re driving  brake  normally but don t pump your brakes  If you do  the  pedal may get harder to push down  If your engine  stops  you will still have some power brake assist  But  vou will use it when you brake  Once the power assist 15  used up  it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal  will be harder to push        Anti Lock Brakes    Your vehicle has anti lock brakes  ABS   ABS is an  advanced electronic braking system that will help  prevent a braking skid     When you start your engine  or when you begin to drive  away  your anti lock brake system will check itself  You  may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while  this test is going on  and you may even notic
257. s or chemical detergents  Use  liquid hand  dish or car washing  mild detergent  soaps   Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based  or  that contuin acid or abrasives  All cleaning agents  should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on  the surface  or they could stain  Dry the finish with a  soft  clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid  surface scratches and water spotting    High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter  your vehicle    Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses   Use lukewarm or cold water  a soft cloth and a liquid  hand  dish or vehicle washing  mild detergent  soap to  clean exterior lamps and lenses  Follow instructions  under  Washing Your Vehicle         Finish Care   Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Buick by  hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint  finish  You can get GM approved cleaning products  Irom your dealer   See  Appearance Care and Materials   in the Index      Your Buick has a  basecoat clearcoat  paint finish  The  clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  basecoat  Always use waxes and polishes that are  non abrasive and made for    basecoat clearcoat   paint finish     Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on     basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the  finish or leave swirl marks        Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  salts  ice melting agents  road oil and tar  tree sap  bird  droppings  chemicals from industrial chimneys  etc   can  damage your 
258. s through the seat to the  adjuster may need to      replaced    If an air bag inflates  you ll need to replace air bag  system parts  See the part on the air hag system earlier in  this section         0 NOTES    1 47       NOTES    1 48    O Section 2 Features and Controls       Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on vour Buick  and information on starting  shifting  and braking  Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working    properly    and what to do if you have a problem     2 2 Keys   2 4 Door Locks   2 8 Reur Door Security Lock   2 9 Remote Keyless Entry System  2 13 Trunk   2 14 Trunk Lid   2 15 Theft   2 16 Universal Theft Deterrent  2 17 PASS Key Il   2  9 New Vehicle    Break In      2 19 Ignition Positions   2 21 Starting Your Engine   2 22 Engine Coolant Heater   2 23 Automatic Transaxle Operation  2 27 Parking Brake   2 28 shifting Into PARK  P        2 30    2 5                   CA                  Lh    Shitting Out of PARK  P   Parking Over Things That Burn  Engine Exhaust   Running Your Engine While  You re Parked   Windows   Horn   Tilt Wheel   Turn Signal Multifunction Lever  Exterior Lamps   Interior Lamps   Mirrors   Storage Compartments   Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter  Sun Visors   Instrument Panel   Instrument Panel Clusters  Warning Lights  Gages and Indicators    Kevs    Leaving young children in a vehicle with the  ignition key is dangerous for many reasons    
259. se refer to the  separate brochure provided by the dealer ar call  1 800 268 6800 for emergency services     Courtesy Transportation    To Buick Motor Division  Quality Means Service    and  service means  keeping vou on the road      Included with your Buick new car warranty    3 years 36 000 miles  60 000 km   whichever occurs  first   is Courtesy Transportation  a program which will  provide Buick retail customers with     e Reimbursement toward a loaner vehicle  courtesy of  Buick Motor Division  for up to five days for  vehicles requiring overnight warranty repairs  Also   reimbursement up to  30 a day  five days maximum   may be available for the cost of a rental car  bus or  even a cab          free one way shuttle ride up to 10 miles  16 km   from the dealership is available for customers whose  vehicles require same day warranty repairs     Courtesy Transportation is Buick s way of extending the  Premium Service you ve come to expect from Buick  and      3 004 dealers  Please review the Courtesy  Transportation glove box card contained in your vehicle   or consult your Buick dealer for details     Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to  rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age  If you are  under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle  Buick  will reimburse you up to  30 day  for any documented  transportation you receive  Please consult your dealer  for details     For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle  Coverage period in the New Ve
260. senger     1 38       Securing a Child Restraint      the Center  Kear 5eat Position       You ll he using the lap belt     A child in a child restraint in the center front seat  can be badly injured by the right front passenger    air bag if it inflates  Never secure a child restraint  in the center front seat  Its always better to  secure a child restraint in the rear seat  You may   however  secure a forward facing child restraint  in the right front passenger seat  but only with  the seat moved all the way back        See the earlier part about the top strap if the child  restraint has one     l        Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch  plate and pulling it along the belt     Put the restraint on the seat  Follow the instructions  for the child restraint    Secure the child in the child restraint as the  instructions say     Run the vehicle s safety belt through or around the  restraint  The child restraint instructions will show  you how     1 39    6  To tighten the belt  pull its free end while you push  down on the child restraint     7  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it ts secure  If it isn t  secure the  restraint in a different place in the vehicle and  contact the child restraint maker for their advice  about how to attach the child restraint properly    To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle s   safety belt  Tt will be ready to work for an adult or larger   child passenger        5  Buc
261. sert the door key          and turn it   2  Once the transmitter js separated  use a pencil to               remove the old battery  Do not use a metal object  Remote Trunk Release    3  Remowe and replace the battery  Replace it as the CUI HL  instructions inside the cover indicate  The 1 RUNK release button   is on the instrument panel   to the left of the steering   column  The transaxle   must he in PARK  P  or   NEUTRAL        If the   remote trunk release button   does not open the trunk    make sure the remote trunk   release lockout switch   in the glove box is in   the on position     4  Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure  no moisture can enter     5  Resynchronize the transmitter by pressing and  holding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for about  eight seconds  You must be within range of the  vehicle  When the transmitter has been  resynchronized  the horn will chirp and the exterior  lamps will Hash once        NOTICE     When replacing the battery  use care not to touch  any of the circuitry  Static from vour body  transferred to these surfaces may damage   the transmitter               2 13    Remote Trunk Release Lockout Trunk Lid    The trunk release lockout   switch in the glove box   must he on for the TRUNK   button to work  This feature   allows you to secure items li can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid   in the trunk when vou must open because carbon monoxide  CO  gas can   leave the ignition key with come into vour vehicle  You ca
262. service  have it done before starting out  Of course   you Il find experienced and able service experts in       Buick dealerships all across North America  They ll be   ready and willing to help if you need it             are some things you can check before a trip    e Windshield Washer Fluid  Is the reservoir         Are  all windows clean inside and outside       Wiper Blades  Are they in good shape       Fuel  Engine       Other Fluids  Have you checked  all levels       Lamps  Are they all working  Are the lenses clean       Tires  They are vitally important to a safe   trouble free trip  Is the tread good enough for  long distance driving  Are the tires all inflated to the  recommended pressure        Weather Forecasts  What s the weather outlook  along your route  Should you delay your trip a short  time to avoid a major storm system     Mups  Do you have up to date maps     4 23    Highway Hypnosis    Is there actually such a condition as  highway hypnosis    Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel  Call it  highway hypnosis  lack of awareness  or whatever     There is something about an easy stretch of road with  the same scenery  along with the hum of the tires on the  road  the drone of the engine  and the rush of the wind  against the vehicle that can make you sleepy  Don t let it  happen to you  If it does  your vehicle can leave the  road in fess than a second  and you could crash and   be injured    What can you do about highway hypnosis  First  be  aw
263. side up  The  plaver will pull it in  The disc should begin playing     If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio  is Off  first press EJECT or RECALL         you re driving on    very rough road or if it   s very hot   the dise may not play and an error code may appear on  the display  When things get back to normal  the disc  should play  IF the disc comes out  it could be that     e E20  The disc is upside down   e        is dirty  scratched or wet        E20  There s too much moisture in the air   Wait  about an hour and try again      I  any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be  carrected  please contact your dealer  If your radio  displays an error number  write it down and provide it  to your dealer when reporting the problem     PREV  1   Press this button to go to the start al the  current track  11 more than eight seconds have played   If vou hold the button or press it more than once  the  player will continue moving back through the disc  The  sound will mute while seeking     3 29    NEXT  2   Press this button to go to the next track         you hold the button or press it more than once  the  player will continue moving forward through the disc   The sound will mute while seeking     The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the  previous and next selections on the disc     44  3   Press and hold this button to quickly reverse  within a track  You will hear sound           4   Press and hold this button to quickly advance  within a 
264. skid  your wheels  aren t rolling  In the steering or cornering skid  too  much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and  lose cornering force  And in the acceleration skid  too  much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin        cornering skid is best handled by casing your foot off  the accelerator pedal    li you have the traction control system  remember  It  helps avoid only the acceleration skid        If you do not have traction control  or if the system is  off  then an acceleration skid is also best handled by  easing your foot off the accelerator pedal     If your vehicle starts to slide  ease your  oot off the  accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the  vehicle to go  If you start steering quickly enough  your  vehicle may straighten out  Always be ready for a  second skid if it occurs     Of course  traction is reduced when water    now           gravel or other material is on the road  For safety  you ll  want to slow down and adjust your driving to these  conditions  It is important to slow down on slippery  surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and  vehicle control more limited     While driving on a surface with reduced traction  try  your hest to avoid sudden steering  acceleration or  braking  including engine braking by shifting to a lower  gear   Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide   You may not realize the surface is slippery until your  vehicle is skidding  Learn to recognize warning   clues    su
265. spection  in Part C of this schedule        If you drive in    highly corrosive environment  your  brake calipers may require additional inspection and  service  at every other tire rotation  See      Caliper Knuckle Maintenance Inspection    under   Periodic Maintenance Inspections  in Part C of   this schedule     7 7        3 000 Miles  5 000 km    6 000 Miles  10 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every LI Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote        C  Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote             Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote              Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule    9 000 Miles  15 000 km  12 000 Miles  20 000 km     Change engine oil and filter  or every  _  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote     An Emission Control Service   See footnote         _  Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote       CI Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote      Also see footno
266. splay the clock  To change what 15  normally shown on the display  station or time   press  the RECALL button until you see the display you want   then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes   If you press the button when the ignition is off       clock  will show for a few seconds     Finding a Station    AM FM  Press this button to switch between               and FMZ  The display shows your selection     TUNE  Press the up or down arrow to choose  radio stations     SEEK  Press the up or down arrow to go to the next  higher or lower station and stay there  The sound will  mute while seeking    SCAN  Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds  and SCAN will appear on the display  Use SCAN to  listen to stations For a few seconds  The radio will go to  a station  stop for a few seconds  then go on to the next  station  Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop  scanning  The sound will mute while scanning     3 26    PUSHBUTTONS  The six numbered pushbuttons let  you return to your favorite stations  You can set up to    8 stations  six       six        and six FMI   Just        Tum the radio on   Press AM FM to select the band     1  Tune in the desired station     1 2    4  Press TONE to select the setting you prefer     Press and hold one of the six numbered butions  The  sound will mute  When it returns  release the button   Whenever you press that numbered button  the  station you set will return and the tone you selected  will he automatically selected For
267. ss light on the instrument  panel  which shows AIR BAG     The system checks the air bag electrical system for  malfunctions  The light tells you if there is an electrical  problem  See  Air Bag Readiness Light  in the Index  lor more information     An inflating air bag can seriouslv injure small  children  Always secure children properly in your  vehicle  To read how  see the part of this manual  called    Children    and the caution label on the  right front passenger s safety belt           1 20      How the Air Bag 5ystem Works       The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument  panel on the passenger s side     Where are the air bags     The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel        1 21    If something is between an occupant and      air  bag  the bag may not inflate properly or it might  force the object into that person  The path of an    inflating air hag must he kept clear  Don t put  anything between an occupant and an air bag   and don t attach or put anything on the  steering wheel hub or on or near any other  air bag covering     When should an air bag inflate     An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe  frontal or near frontal crash  The air bag will inflate   only tf the impact speed is above the system s designed   threshold level  If your vehicle goes straight into      wall that doesn t move or deform  the threshold level is  about 9 to 15 mph  14 to 24 km h   The threshold level  can vary  however  with s
268. st stay on and don t flash as you signal a         or a lane change  a signal bulb may be burned out    and other drivers won t see your turn signal           bulb is burned out  replace it to help avoid an  accident  Hf the arrows don t go on at all when you  signal a turn  Check the fuse  see    Fuses and Circuit  Breakers    in the Index  and for bumed out bulbs              Signal On  hime    I  your tum signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile   1 2km   a chime will sound at each fash of the tum  signal  To turn off the chime  move the turn signal lever  to the off position     2 35    Headlamp High Low Beam Changer               To change the headlamps    from low beam to high  beam or high beam to low  beam  pull the turn signal  lever toward you and  release it  When the high  beams are       this light on        instrument panel will  also be on     Windshield Wipers       The windshield wipers are controlled by turmng the    band marked WIPER     For a single wiping cycle  turn the band to MIST  Hold  it there until the wipers start  then let go  The wipers will  stop after one cycle  If you want more cycles  hold the  band on MIST longer     For steady wiping at low speed  turn the band away  from you to the LO position  For high speed wiping   turn the band further  to       To stop the wipers  move  the band to OFF     The wiper speed may be set for a long or short delay  between wipes  This can be very useful in light rain or  snow  Turn the band to choose 
269. system to OFF        Voltage Indicator  If Equipped     If your vehicle is equipped  with the gage cluster  this  gage shows voltage in the  electrical system     The normal range is      to 15 volts  If the gage   reading stays in either red range  or the battery warning  light turns on  have your Buick dealer check the  electrical system             2 61    Brake System Warning Light    Your Buick s hydraulic brake system is divided into two  parts  If one part isn t working  the other part can still  work and stop you  For good braking  though  you need  both parts working well     If the warning light comes on  there could be a brake  problem  Have your brake system inspected right away     This light should come on  when you turn the key to  START  If it doesn t come  on then  have it fixed so it  will be ready to warn vou if  there s a problem     BRAKE  1        It the light  and chime come on while you are driving   pull off the road and stop carefully  You may notice that  the pedal 15 harder to push  Or  the pedal may go closer  to the floor  It may take longer to stop  If the light is still        have the vehicle towed for service   See  Towing  Your Vehicle  in the Index      Your brake system may not be working properly  if the brake system warning light is on  Driving    with the hrake system warning light on can lead  to an accident  If the light is still on after you ve  pulled off the road and stopped carefullv  have  the vehicle towed for service        Whe
270. t    symbol  Failure to use the  recommended oil can result in engine damage not  covered by vour warranty        GM Goodwrench oi  meets all the requirements for  your vehicle     If you are in an area where the temperature falls below     20  F   29  C   consider using either an SAE 5W 30  synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil  Both will provide  easier Cold starting and better protection for your engine  ar extremely low temperatures        Engine Oil Additives   Don t add anything to your oil  Your Buick dealer 15   ready to advise if you think something should be added    When to Change Engine Oil   If any one of these is true for you  use the short trip city   maintenance schedule      Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles  8 to 16 km    This is particularly important when outside  temperatures are below freezing       Most trips include extensive idling  such as frequent  driving in stop and vo traffic      Most trips are through dusty areas     You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on tap of    your vehicle     e The vehicle is used for delivery service  police  taxi  or other commercial application     Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to  break down sooner  If any one of these is true for your  vehicle  then you need ta change your oil and filter  every 3 000 miles  5 000 km  or 3 months    whichever  occurs first   See  Change Oil Indicator  in the Index         If none of them is true  use the long trip highway  maintenance schedule  Change the
271. t Used           2 Not Used  3 Power Seats Circuit Breaker  4 Not Used      5 Nat Used  LA PASS Key    1 2        8 6 7 8 9  ls 2A 5pare     AA Not Used   B   4   Not Used      i              5A Up Level HVAC  ALM  Cruise    Control  Cluster         Courtesy Lamps  Power Mirrors          Not Used  Ji   il                   Perimeter Lighting    Not Used          D   IB Turn Signal  Back Up Lamps  BTS      2B Spare       Not Used                   ne       Fuse         OB  7B      OB  ic  2    AC  4    SC  6C  7    SC  9    ID  2D        4D  5D    L sage   Anti Lock Brake System  Computer  Command Control   Brake and Hazard Lamps   Not Used   Interior Lighting   Cigarette Lighter   Air Bag System   Spare   Not Used   Not Used   Cooling Fans  Transaxle  Parking Lamps  Interior Lamps  Not Used   Parking Lamps   Radio  Cluster   Telltale  Chime  Cluster  RAC  LCM  Spare   Not Used   Not Used   Base A C    Fuse  6D  70  jJ    ap  IE  2E  AE  4                            9E    Usage   Not Used   Not Used   Radio   Not Used   Not Used   Air Bag System  PASS Key  Not Used   Not Used   Rear Detog   Misc Engine Non OBD II  Not Used   Wipers  Washer         Used    Passenger s Side Fuse Block    Additional fuses are located in the relay center  on the  passenger s side  below the instrument panel  You must  remove the sound insulator on the right side of the  passenger footwell to replace these fuses     Since the replacement of these fuses can be difficult  we  recommend that you see y
272. t a CD while the ienition or the radio  is olf  first press EJECT      RECALL    If you re driving on a very rough road or if its very hot   the disc may not play and an error code may appear or  the display  When things get back to normal  the disc  should play  If the disc comes out  it could be that     e E20  The disc is upside down     3 24    e E20  lt is dirty  scratched or wet    e E20  There s too much moisture in the air   Wait  about an hour and try again     If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be   corrected  please contact your dealer  If your radia   displays an error number  write it down and provide   it to your dealer when reporting the problem     PREV  1   Press this button to go to the start of the  current track if more than eight seconds have played   If you hold the button or press it more than once  the  player will continue moving back through the disc   The sound will mute while seeking     NEXT  2   Press this button to go Lo the next track   If vou hold the button or press it more than once  the  player will continue moving forward through the disc   The sound will mute while seeking     The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the  previous and next selections on the disc       4 4  2   Press and hold this button to quickly reverse  within a track  You will hear sound   b  4   Press and hold this button to quickly advance  within a track  You will hear sound        RAND  6   Press this button to hear the tracks in  random  rather
273. t armed until  the SECURITY light goes off     2 16    If a door or the trunk is opened without the key or Remote  Keyless Entry transmitter  the alarm will go off  It will also  vo off if the trunk lock is damaged  Your vehicle s lamps  will flash and the horn will sound for three minutes  and  then will go off in order to save battery power    Remember  the theft deterrent system won t activate if you  lock the doors with a key or manual door lock  It activates  only if you use a power door lock switch with a door  open  or the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter  You should  also remember that you can start your vehicle with the  correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off  You must  still shut off the alarm by inserting the key in the door  lock  ar by pressing the UNLOCK burton on the Remote  Keyless Entry transmitter    Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident         i you don   t want to activate the thett deterrent  system  lock the door hy using the door key or the  manual door lock switch       Always unlock a door with a key  or use the Remote  Keyless Entry System transmitter  Unlocking a door         other way will set off the alarm    If you set off the alarm by accident  unlock any door   with your key    You can also tum off the alarm by using the Remote   Keyless Entry transmitter  if you have it  The alarm   won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way     Testing the Alarm    The alarm can be tested by first having the driver s  wi
274. t the child is so small that the shoulder belt is  very close to the child s face or neck         Move the child toward the center of the vehicle  but  be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s  shoulder  so that in a crash the child s upper body  would have the restraint that belts provide  If the  child is sitting in    rear seat outside position  see     Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  in the Index  If  the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still  very close to the child s face or neck  you might  want to place the child in the center seat position   the one that has only a lap belt              Never do this     Here a child is sitting in a seat that has     lap shoulder belt  but the shoulder part is behind    the child  If the child wears the belt in this way  in  a crash the child might slide under the belt  The  helt s force would then be applied right on the  child s abdomen  That could cause serious or  fatal injuries        Wherever the child sits  the lap portion of the belt  should be worn low and snug on the hips  just touching  the child s thighs  This applies belt force to the child s  pelvic bones in a crash     Safety Belt Extender    If the vehicles safety belt will Fasten around you  you  should use it     But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten  your  dealer will order you an extender  It s free  When you go  in to order it  take the heaviest coat you will wear  so the  extender will be long enough for you  The extender wi
275. te           DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 9          15 000 Miles  25 000              Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote       _  Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving  in dusty conditions  Replace filter if  necessary       Ennussion Control Service   See footnote          ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 10    18 000 Miles  30 000 km     _  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service   See footnote          Lubricate chassis components  or every   6 months  whichever occurs first      See footnote       7  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     See footnote        ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY           21  000 Miles  35 000 km    24 000 Miles  40 000 km          Change engine oil and filter  or every     Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service   See footnote          Emission Control Service   See footnote        L  Lubricate chassis components  or every  6 months  whichever occurs first     See footnote 8      O Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information    See footnote      Also see footnote        ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY  DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 
276. ter every  50 hours of use  Your radio may display CLN to indicate  that vou have used your tape player for 50 hours without  resetting the tape clean timer  If this message appears   on the display  your cassette tape player needs to be  cleaned  Tt will still play tapes  but you should clean it  as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and  player     you notice a reduction in sound quality  try a  known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape  player at fault  If this other cassette has no improvement  in sound quality  clean the tape player     Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action   non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which serub  the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn  A  scrubbing action cleaning cassette is available through  your Buick dealership        You may also choose    non scrubbing action  wet type  cleaner which uses a cassette with    fabric belt to clean  the tape head  This type of cleaning cassette        nol  clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner     After you clean the player  press and hold EJECT for  five seconds to reset the CLN indicator  The radio will  display     to show the indicator wus reset     Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality  may degrade over time  Always make sure the cassette  tape is in good condition before you have your tape  player serviced     Care of Your Compact Discs    Handle discs carefully  Store them in their original  cases or other protective c
277. tes while you re parked  to see   il the warning stops  But then  if you still have the  warning  turn off the engine and get everyone out of  fhe vehicle until it cools down    You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service  help right away        When you decide it   s safe to lift the hood  here s what  vou Il see     An electric fan under the hood can start up even  when the engine is not running and can injure  you  Keep hands  clothing and tools away from    any underhood electric fan        If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling   don t da unvthing else until it cools down        A  Coolant Recovery Tank  B  Radiator Pressure Cap        Electric Engine Fans       tn  a  un    Heater and radiator hoses  and other engine  parts  can be very hot  Don t touch them  If you  do  you can be burned     Don t run the engine if there is a leak  If vou run  the engine  it could lose all coolant  That could  cause an engine fire  and you could be burned   Get any leak fixed before vou drive the vehicle        The coolant level should be at or above the FULL NOTICE    COLD mark    If it isn t  you may have a leak in the radiator hoses  Engine damage from running your engine  heater hoses  radiator  water pump or somewhere else in without coolant isn t covered by your warranty        the cooling system     If there seems to be no leak  with the engine on  check to  see if the electric engine fans are running  If the engine  is overheating  both fans shoul
278. the delay time  The  closer to LO  the shorter the delay     Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor  A  circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools  Clear  away snow or ice to prevent an overload     Keep in mind that damaged wiper blades may prevent  you from seeing well enough to drive safely  To avoid  damage  be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper  blades before using them  If your blades do become  damaged  get new blades or blade inserts        Windshield Washer    At the top of the turn signal multifunction lever  there s  a paddle with the word PUSH on it  To spray washer  fluid on the windshield  push the paddle for less than a  second  The wipers will clear the window and either  stop or return to your preset speed  For more washer  cycles  push and hold the paddle     In freezing weather  don t use your washer until    the windshield is warmed  Otherwise the washer  fluid can form ice on the windshield  blocking  your vision        2 37    Cruise Control  If Equipped     5 Dg With cruise control  you can    T ZI maintain a speed of about    25 mph  40 km h  or more  without keeping your foot  on the accelerator  This can  really help on long trips        Cruise control does not work at speeds below about  25 mph  40 km h     When you apply your brakes  the cruise control  shuts off     2 38        Cruise control can be dangerous where you  can t drive safely at a steady speed  So   don t use your cruise control on winding    roads or in heavy 
279. this  function is complete  To return to the stations you  manually set  press AUTO SET again     Setting the Tone    BASS  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease bass     TREB  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to increase or decrease treble  If a station is weak  or noisy  you may want to decrease the treble     Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  vou re not using them     TONE  This feature allows you to choose preset bass  and treble equalization settings designed for classical   pop  rock  jazz  talk and country westem stations   CLASS will appear on the display when you first press  TONE  Euch time you press it  another setting wall  uppear on the display  Press it again after C  amp  W  appears and MANUAL will appear  Tone control will  return to the BASS and TREB knobs  Also  if vou use  the BASS and TREB knobs  control will return to them  and MANUAL will appear     3 19    Adjusting the Speakers    BAL  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn the  knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers   The middle position balances the sound between  the speakers     FADE  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn  the knob to move the sound to the front or rear  speakers  The middle position balances the sound  between the speakers     Push these knobs back into their stored positions when  you re not using them     Playing a Cassette Tape    The longer side with the tape visible sho
280. thoul imourring Hole      Canadan Customers All listed prices        quoted      11 5  turda Camadun residents  abligatan  Allow ample time tor ealteery    ane 1n make checks payable in US  tunis       cover Canadian postage  add  11 50 plus tha    Li  B  onder processing     i    NOTES      Section 9 Index       Air                             dn          dos    a                   1 19 Armed spe              2 51  How Does it Restrain                CE e Ei 1 23                   RD               E E 2 52  HOW AL PUM  Luces a aw mirer AES IUD 1 21 Audio Equipment  Adding                         23     ECON  iia casts         n      mals             1 21 Audio  Steering Wheel Touch Controls                3 33             Bi  MEME 1 20  2 60 AGENCE    E                  NE    3 12                         ONCE ORTA                  1 24 Automatic  What Makes                            EXE Esai 1 22 CNOR  EIVE           es run Ey bis seed x iara          sis d 23  What Will You See After it Inflates                 1 23 Shifting              Estee eR rege aay ar          2 23  When Should it Inflate                           1 22            exerce OR m ox         HIZO 2 23   art SRM der ler rae Pct aiv ia             6 14                               E              7 40   Air Conditioning              PEE CI VESP RP  3 7    Presets  Flu zov sy cai ele            6 16   Air Conditioning Refrigerants                6 52 Transaxle Operation   TOT             Air Control  Climate
281. tifying NHTSA  or Transport Canada   in a situation like this  we certainly hope you ll notify  us  Please call us at 1 800 321 7300  or write    Buick Motor Division   Customer Relations Center    02 E  Hamilton Avenue  Flint  MI 48550    In Canada  please call us at 1 800 263 3777  English   or 1 300 263 7854  French   Or  write    General Motors of Canada Limited   Customer Communication Centre    908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario LIH         Ordering Service and Owner  Publications in Canada   Service manuals  service bulletins  owner s manuals and  other service literature are available for purchase for all  current and past model General Motors vehicles    The toll Iree telephone number for ordering information  in Canada is 1 800 668 3539     8 9       1997 BUICK SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION    The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out  the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check  money order   or credit card information to Helm  Incorporated  address below         CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 BUICK    SERVICE MANUALS   Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information  on engines  transmission  axle  suspension  brakes   electrical  steering  body  etc    RETAIL SELL PRICE   90 00    TRANSMISSION  TRANSAXLE  TRANSFEH CASE  UNIT REPAIR MANUAL   This manual provides information on unit repair service  procedures  adjustments and specifi
282. tion  of the damage          6 41    Buying New Tires    To find out what kind and size of tires you need  look at  the Tire  Loading Information label     Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while    The tires installed on vour vehicle when it was new had    a Tire Performance Criteria Specification  TPC Spec  driving  lf you mix tires of different sizes or types  number on each tire s sidewall  When you get new tires   radial and bias belted tires   the vehicle may not  ger ones with that same TPC Spec number  That way handle properly  and you could have a crash   your vehicle will continue to have tres that are designed Using tires of different sizes may also cause   to give proper endurance  handling  speed rating  damage to your vehicle  Be sure to use the same    traction  ride and other things during normal service on size and type tires on all wheels   your vehicle  If your tires have an all season tread  design  the TPC number will be followed by an  MS    for mud and snow      Its all right to drive with your compact spare   though  It was developed for use on your vehicle        If you ever replace your tires with those not having a  TPC Spec number  make sure they are the same size   load range  speed rating and construction type  bias   bias belted or radial  as your original tires      UU                                               Uniform Tire Quality Grading    The following information relates to the system  developed by the United States National 
283. tions and illustrations may not be correct   Before you do anything  turn on the hazard  warning Flashers   When vou call  tell the towing service   e That your vehicle can only be towed with certain   equipment  as described later in this section       hat your vehicle has front  wheel drive      The make  model and year of your vehicle   e Whether you can still move the shift lever       f there was      accident  what was damaged     When the towing service arrives  let the tow operator  know that this manual contains detailed towing  instructions and illustrations  The operator may want  to see them           vehicle can fall from    car carrier if it isn t  adequately secured  This can cause a collision   serious personal injury and vehicle damage  The  vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or  steel cables before it is transported    Don t use substitutes  ropes  leather straps   canvas webbing  etc   that can be cut by sharp  edges underneath the towed vehicle  Always use  T hooks inserted in the T hook slots  Never use  J hooks           will damage drivetrain and  suspension components     To help avoid injury to you or others     Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is  being towed    Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds   Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured   Never get under your vehicle after it has   been lifted by the tow truck    Always secure the vehicle on each side with  separate safety chains when towing it    Never use  J h
284. track  You will hear sound     RAND  6   Press this button to hear the tracks in  random  rather than sequential  order  Press RAND  again to turn off random play     RECALL  Press this button to see which track is  playing  Press it again within five seconds to see how  long it has been playing  To change what is normally  shown on the display  track or elapsed time   press the  RECALL button until you see the display you want     then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes                Press this button to play the radio when a  disc is in the player     SOURCE  Press this button to change to the disc  function when the radio is on  When a disc is inserted   the disc will play until you press AM FM  Then the  disc will stop playing and the radio will play  Press  SOURCE again to play a disc again  CD PLAY will  show on the display                 Press this button to remove the disc  The  radio will play        you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the  player  it will stay in the player  When you turn on the  ignition or system  the disc will start playing where it  stopped  if it was the last selected audio source    Also  as a protection feature  if a CD is ejected and left  in the player  it will be pulled back in the player with  the ignition on or off  H you leave a compact disc in the  player while listening to the radio  it may become warm        Theft Deterrent Feature                          is designed to discourage theft of your  radio  
285. traffic    Cruise control can be dangerous on  slippery roads  On such roads  fast changes  in tire traction can cause needless wheel  spinning  and you could lose control  Don t  use cruise control on slippery roads        If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional  traction control system begins to limit wheel spin    the cruise control will automatically disengage   See     Traction Control System    in the Index   When road  conditions allow you to safely use it again  you may turn  the cruise control back on        Setting Cruise Control    If you leave vour cruise control switch on when    you re not using cruise  you might hit a button    and go into cruise when vou don t want to  You  could be startled and even lose control  Keep  the cruise control switch OFF until you want  to use it     1  Move the cruise control switch to ON   2  Get up to the speed you want     3  Push in the SET button    at the end of the lever  and release it     a 1  Take your foot off the  accelerator pedal              Resuming a Set Speed    Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed   and then you apply the brake  This  of course  shuts off  the cruise control  But you don t need to reset it     Once you re going about  25 mph  40 km h  or more   you can move the cruise  control switch from ON to         resume accelerate   for about half a second     You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay  there  Remember that if you hold the switch at R A  longer t
286. trated washer fluid   follow the manufacturer s instructions for  adding water    Adding Washer Fluid Don t mix water with ready to use washer   fluid  Water can cause the solution to freeze   and damage your washer fluid tank and  other parts of the washer system  Also   water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid    Fill vour washer fluid tank only   three quarters full when it s very cold  This   allows for expansion if freezing occurs   which could damage the tank if it is  completely full    Don t use radiator antifreeze in your   windshield washer  It can damage your   washer svstem and paint        6 24                  Brake Fluid                      5    GG    ait  wr it    Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here   bis Filled    with DOT 3 brake fluid     There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in  the reservoir might go down  The first is that the brake  fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal  brake lining wear  When new linings are put in  the fluid  level goes back up  The other reason is that Muid is  leaking out of the brake system  IH itis  you should have          vour brake system fixed  since a leak means that sooner  ar later your brakes won t work well  or won t work  at all     So  it isn t a good idea to  top atf  your brake fluid   Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak  If you add fluid  when your linings are worn  then you ll have too much  fluid when you get new brake linings  You should add   or remove  brake fluid 
287. trunk will unlock when the opened trunk symbol is  pressed when the ignition is OFF  The trunk symbol will also  work when the ignition is on  but only while in PARK  P      Instant Alarm    When the button with the hom symbol on the remote  kevless entry transmitter      pressed  the hom will sound  and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to two  minutes  This can be turned off by pressing the instant  alarm button again or by turning the ignition to ON  If  your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Theft  Deterrent feature  vou may also turn off the instant alarm  by unlocking the vehicle with a key     Resynchronization    Il only the instant alarm works  the transmitter needs to  be resynchronized to the receiver  Do this by pressing and  holding both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for about  eight seconds  You must be within range of the vehicle     Once the transmitter has been resynchronized  the horn  will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash once  The  system should now operate properly        Security Feedback    This feature provides feedback to the driver when the  vehicle receives a command from the key transmitter   One of the following modes may be selected for  each transmitter     Mode Security Feedback  0 No feedback when locking or  unlocking vehicle     No feedback when locking  exterior    lamps flash when unlocking vehicle     2 Exterior lamps Nash when locking  no  feedback when unlocking vehicle   3 Exterior lamps flash when locking and    
288. uld face to the  right  If the ignition and the radio are on  the tape can he  inserted and will begin playing       you hear nothing or  hear a garbled sound  the tape may not be in squarely   Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over     While the tape is playing  use the VOLUME  FADE   BAL  BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the  radio  Other controls may have different functions when  a tape is inserted  The display will show an arrow to  show which side of the tape is playing  If vou want to  insert a tape when the ignition or radio is off  first press  EJECT or RECALL     3 20    Your tape bias is set automatically     If E and a number appear on the radio display  the tape  won t play because of an error     e   10  The tape is tight and the player can t turn  the tape hubs  Remove the tape  Hold the tape with  the open end down and try to turn the right huh  counterclockwise with a pencil  Turn the tape over  and repeat  If the hubs do not turn easilv         tape  may he damaged and should not be used in the  player  Try a new tape to make sure your player is  working properly     e Ell  The tape is broken  Try a new tape     If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be  corrected  please contact your dealer  If your radio  displays an error number  write it down and provide it  to your dealer when reporting the problem     PREV  1   Press this button to search for the previous   selection on the tape  Your tape must have at least three  seconds 
289. unlocking vehicle    4 Exterior lamps flash and horn chirps  when lacking       feedback when  unlocking vehicle    3 Exterior lamps flash and horn chirps  when locking  exterior lamps flash  when unlocking vehicle     Feedback will be provided according to the mode that  has been selected     Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 5  To   change to another mode       Press and hold the driver s power door lock switch    2  Press the opened trunk button on the transmitter  The  transmitter will remain 1n its current mode    3  Press the opened trunk button again  Each time the  opened trunk button is pressed  the transmitter will  advance      the next mode     4  Release the power door lock switch     Personal Choice Features    The following list of features that are available on your  LeSabre can be programmed to the driver s preference  for each of the key transmitters     e Memory Door Locks  This feature programs your  door locks to automatically lock or unlock when  shifting in and out of PARK  P        Security Feedback  This feature provides feedback  to the driver when the vehicle receives a command  trom the key transmitter           Delayed Locking  This feature lets the driver delay  the actual locking of the vehicle  When all doors  have been closed  the doors will lock automatically  after five seconds      Perimeter Lighting  When the UNLOCK button on  the key transmitter is pressed  the headlamps   parking lamps  back up lamps and cornering lamps  will tur
290. ure     1  With the ignition on  press and hold the driver s  power door lock switch  All doors will lock     t3    Cvcle the headlamp switch four times  On the third  eyele  the doors will lock if the feature 15 now off  or  will unlock if the feature has been turned on     3  To change modes  cycle the headlamp switch once  more  A locking action will confirm the new mode     4  Release the power door lock switch     To turn the feature off  repeat the previous procedure     2 7    Rear Door Security Lock       Your LeSabre is equipped  NI with rear door security  locks that help prevent  passengers  rom opening  the rear doors of your  vehicle from the inside        To use one of these locks        Open one of the rear doors     1 3    Move the lever located on the door edge  all the way  up to the ENGAGED position     3  Close the door     4  Dothe same thing to the other rear door lock     The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from  the inside when this feature 1s 1n use  If you want to  open    rear door when the security lock is on     1  Unlock the door   2  Then open the door from the outside     If vou don t cancel the security lock feature  adults or  older children who ride in the rear seat won t be ahle to  apen the rear door from the inside  You should let adults  and older children know how these security locks work   and how to cancel the locks     To cancel the rear door lock     1  Unlock the door from the inside and open the door  from the outside
291. uster  Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low  If    you do  your engine can become so hot that it  catches fire  You or others could be burned   Check your oil as soon as possible and have your    One of these lights will tell yeu that there could be a  problem with your engine oil pressure  If your car has  the optional gage cluster  you can read your oil pressure    directly from the gage on your instrument panel  vehicle serviced     NOTICE     Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems  can be costly and is not covered by your warranty        There are three ways this light can come      briefly   which is normal and doesn t show a problem  They are         The light comes on when you turn your key to RUM   It goes off once vou turn it to START  That s just     check to be sure the light works  If it doesn t  be sure  to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if  something goes wrong                  68    Check Oil Level Light  If Equipped     The CHECK OIL LEVEL  light turns on for three  seconds as    bulb check  each time the ignition key       turned to the RUN position   If the light doesn t turn on   have your vehicle serviced     CHECK    OIL LEVEL       If the engine oil is more than one quart  0 95 L  low and  the engine has been shut off for at least eight minutes   ihe CHECK OIL LEVEL LIGHT will turn on for about  one minute and will then remain off until the next time  you start the vehicle    If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light turns on  the e
292. vehicle s finish if they remain on painted  surfaces  Wash the vehicle as soon as possible  If    necessary  use non abrasive cleaners that are marked  safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter     Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging  weather  and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period  of years  You        help to keep the paint finish looking  new hy keeping your Buick garaged or covered  whenever possible     Cleaning Aluminum Wheels   If Equipped     Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with  mild soap and water  Rinse with clean water  After  rinsing thoroughly  dry with a soft clean towel  A wax         then be applied     The surface of these wheels 15 similar to the painted  surface of your vehicle  Don t use strong soaps   chemicals  abrasive polishes  abrasive cleaners or  abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could  damage the surface    Don t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle  wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes   These hrushes can also damage the surface of   these wheels       6 51       Cleaning Tires    To clean your tires  use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner     NOTICE     When applying a tire dressing always take care to  wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted  surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle   Petroleum based products may damage the   paint finish         Sheet Metal Damage    If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  repair or replacem
293. very hot days  the  system will automatically enter the              mode and  the temperature door will be positioned at the full cold  position for maximum cooling  If the system 18 not in  the AUTO mode               should be selected to provide  maximum cooling  You can choose the extreme comfort  setting of 607 F  16  C   but the system will not cool any  faster by choosing the extreme comfort setting     When the air conditioner is on  you may sometimes  notice slight changes in your vehicle s engine speed  and power  This is normal because the system is  designed to cycle the compressor      and off to keep  the desired temperature     3 7    Heating    If your vehicle has the electronic touch system  on  cold days  use HTR with the TEMPERATURE lever  toward WARM     If your vehicle has the Dual Automatic Comfortemp  system  and on cold days  if the AUTO mode is selected   the system will automatically direct the air toward the  floor and the temperature door will be positioned at the         hot position  You can choose the extreme comfort  setting of 907 F  32  C  but the system will not warm up  any faster by selecting the extreme comfort setting  If  the outside temperature is cold  the fan will be delayed  to avoid blowing cold air  Pushing the FAN  AIR FLOW  or FRONT buttons will override this delay  turn off the  AUTO mode and change the fan speed     With each system  outside air will be brought in and sent    through the floor outlets  The heater works best i
294. w out of the  engine fans  filler neck  reinstall the pressure cap  Be sure the   arrows on the pressure cap line up like this     7  By this time  the coolant level inside the radiator  filler neck may be lower  If the level is lower  add  more of the proper DEX COOL   coolant mixture  through the filler neck until the level reaches the  base af the filler neck                       Ifa Tire Goes Flat    It s unusual for a tire to    blow out  while you re driving   especially if you maintain your tires properly  If air goes       of a tire  it s much more likely to leak out slowly   But if you should ever have a    blowout     here are a few  tips about what to expect and what to do     If a front tire fails  the flat tire will create    drag that  pulls the vehicle toward that side  Take your foot off the  accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly   Steer to maintain lane position  and then gently brake to  a stop well out of the traffic lane     A rear blowout  particularly on    curve  acts much like a  skid and may require the same correction you d use in     skid  In any rear blowout  remove your foot from the  accelerator pedal  Get the vehicle under control by  steering the way vou want the vehicle to go  It may be  very bumpy and noisy  but you can still steer  Gently  brake to a stop    well off the road if possible     If a tire goes flat  the next part shows how to use your  jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely        Changing a Flat Tire   I
295. way from the bulb base to remove the 6  Push the new bulb straight onto the retainer          form the retainer  7  Reverse these steps to replace the bulb assembly     Front Turn Signal    The front turn signal bulbs can be accessed from under  the front of the vehicle  Reach up from under the vehicle  and  while pushing in the tab on the bulb assembly  turn    assembly counterclockwise and remove  Remove the old    hulh by pulling it straight out of the retainer  Replace the  bulb and turn the bulb assembly back into place     Cornering Lamps    Follow the same procedure as used for replacing the  headlamps  However  to remove the cornering lamp  bulb  turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise and pull  the bulb straight out     6 32    Trunk Mounted Back Up and Taillamps       1  Loosen and remove the eight fasteners  four per  side  that hold the assembly in place  The assembly  for both sides 18 one piece  The entire piece must       removed to replace any bulbs           2  Pull out the assembly  3  Push in the tab and turn the bulb assembly  counterclockwise to remove it     ue mu Util  E               4  Remove the old bulb by pulling it straight out       Replace the bulb and reverse the steps ro install the  new bulb assemhly        Rear Turn Signals        Open the trunk  Pull the carpet away from the rear  area to access the turn signal bulb assembly     nra    Turn the bulb socket one quarter turn  counterclockwise  while pressing it firmly     Pull the bulb socket
296. witch up or down        from the outer sun visor                                                               2 53            ode       OD               Air Outlet      Instrument Panel Intensity Control     wilight Sentinel      Turn Signal Multifunction Lever    Tilt Steering Wheel Lever     Instrument Cluster Gages     Hazard Warning Flasher Switch    Audio System     Passenger s Side SRS  Air Bag       Glove Box     Chmate Control System     Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter     Ignition Switch     Driver s Side SRS  Air Bag  and Hom      Traction Control Button      Trunk Release Button      Hood Release    d x  Instrument Panel Clusters  Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how vour vehicle is running  You ll know how  fast you re going  how much fuel you re using  and many other things you ll need to drive safely and economically   Your Buick is equipped with one of these instrument panel clusters  which includes indicator warning lights and gages  that are explained on the following pages              17 Cy X     20      40 50 50 70      oo    4          ees                SAX NA      4 2      ex  oe    WOLT             mau RO c0 40 80 80 100 120 140 160   gt  2   UNLEADED FUEL DALY      Fux AMES 21 I B         panogi       Standard Cluster  2 56             _      60 E          ss V 40 erem 80 UL P  100 WE 280 04 S            90 101 101101 10  2        s i 26       1 1  i 140 e TRIP    1       Plies    205 TUM pozos            oM Nagy  M
297. y injured   Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the  steps in this section  Ask vour Buick dealer         advice and information about towing a trailer  with vour vehicle           NOTICE     Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your  vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by    your warranty  To pull a trailer correctly  follow  the advice in this part  and see your Buick dealer  for important information about towing a trailer  with your vehicle        Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the  proper trailer towing equipment  To identify what the  vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle  you  should read the information in    Weight of the Trailer   that appears later in this section  But trailering is  different than just driving your vehicle by itself   Trailering means changes in handling  durability and  fuel economy  Successful  safe trailering takes correct  equipment  and it has to      used properly     That s the reason for this part  In it are many  time tested  important trailering tips and safety rules   Many of these are important for your safety and that of  your passengers  So please read this section carefully  before you pull a trailer     Load pulling components such as the engine  transaxle    wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder   against the drag of the added weight  The engine ts   required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under   greater loads  generating extra heat  What s more 
298. y speed  Wait to  accelerate until you are out of the curve  and then  accelerate gently into the straightaway     4 11    Steering      Emergencies    There are times when steering can be more effective  than braking  For example  you come over a hill and  find a truck stopped in your lane  or a car suddenly pulls  out from nowhere  or a child darts out from between  parked cars and stops right in front of you  You can  avoid these problems by braking    if you can stop in  time  But sometimes you can t  there isn t room   That s the time for evasive action     steering around  the prohlem    Your Buick can perform very well in emergencies like  these  First apply your brakes   See    Braking in  Emergencies  earlier in this section   It is better to  remove as much speed as you        from a possible  collision  Then steer around the problem  to the left or  right depending on the space available     4 12       An emergency like this requires close attention and a  quick decision  If you are holding the steering wheel at  the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions  you can  turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing  either hand  But you have to act fast  steer quickly  and  just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have  avoided the object     The fact that such emergency situations are always  possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at  all times and wear safety belts properly        Off Road Recovery    You may find sometime that vour rig
299. your compact spare  Using    them can damage your vehicle and can damage  the chains too  Don t use tire chains on your  compact spare         1 q  If You re Stuck  In Sand  Mud   Ice or 5now  What vou don t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is  to spin your wheels too fast  The method known as   rocking  can help you get out when you re stuck  but  you must use caution     If vou let your tires spin at high speed  thev can  explode  and you or others could be injured  And   the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can    overheat  That could cause an engine  compartment fire or other damage  When you re  stuck  spin the wheels as little as possible  Don t  spin the wheels above 35 mph  55 km h  as shown  on the speedometer        NOTICE     Spinning vour wheels can destroy parts of your  vehicle as well as the tires  If you spin the wheels  too fast while shifting your transaxle back and  forth  you can destroy your transaxle         For information about using tire chains on your vehicle   see  Tire Chains    in the Index     Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out    First  turn your steering wheel left and right  That will  clear the area around your front wheels  If your vehicle  has traction control  you should turn the system off   See   Traction Control System  in the Index   Then shift  back and forth between REVERSE      and a forward  gear  spinning the wheels as little as possible  Release  the accelerator pedal while you shift  and press lightly  on the acceler
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
GP50 Gradient Pump Operator`s Manual  be quiet! Dark Power PRO 1200W (P7)    Registrazione  Lottery - Stoltronic  BF 43 Pro - ikra GmbH  Broan Surface Mounted Wood Medicine Cabinet 902 User's Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file